TOSHIBA SD-V396SU DVD Video Player SERVICE MANUAL

The TOSHIBA SD-V396SU DVD Video Player is a versatile device that combines the convenience of a DVD player with the functionality of a VCR. This unit offers multiple playback options for both DVD and VHS tapes, including MP3/WMA/JPEG playback, zoom, repeat playback and more. It also features a built-in timer recording function for TV programs.

PDF

Document

FILE NO. 810-200414

SERVICE MANUAL

DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VIDEO

CASSETTE RECORDER

SD-V396SU

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, April, 2004

DIGITAL VIDEO

DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VIDEO

CASSETTE RECORDER

SD-V396SU

OWNER’S MANUAL

Introduction

Connections

Basic setup

Playback

(VCR)

Recording

(VCR)

Other functions

(VCR)

Basic playback

(DVD)

Advanced playback

(DVD)

Function setup

(DVD)

Others

Printed in Thailand

This device does not tape-record copy protected DVD Video Discs.

04/04 U

Introduction

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER

(OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN

EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN

BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.

WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the partly responsible for compliance with the

FCC Rules could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

CAUTION:

THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS USER'S GUIDE CARE-

FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTE-

NANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER

THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLO-

SURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED.

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE

STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

1. READ INSTRUCTIONS

All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

2. RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS

The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

3. HEED WARNINGS

All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

4. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS

All operating and use instructions should be followed.

5. CLEANING

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

Use a damp cloth for cleaning the exterior cabinet only.

6. ATTACHMENTS

The manufacturer of this unit does not make any recommendations for attachments, as they may cause hazards.

7. WATER AND MOISTURE

Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

8. ACCESSORIES

PORTABLE CART WARNING

(symbol provided by RETAC)

Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table.

The unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit.

8A. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.

9. VENTILATION

Slots and openings in the cabinet back or bottom are provided for ventilation,

S3125A to ensure reliable operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating.

These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the unit on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided and/or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

10. POWER SOURCE

This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For units intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.

11. GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION

This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Instead of the polarized alternating-current line plug, your unit may be equipped with a 3-wire grounding-type plug (a plug having a third (grounding) pin). This plug will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This too, is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet.Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.

12. POWER-CORD PROTECTION

Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.

Introduction

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

13. LIGHTNING

To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the unit due to lightning and power line surges.

14. POWER LINES

An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall onto or against such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be fatal.

15. OVERLOADING

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

16. OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY

Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

17. OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING

If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the

National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

18. SERVICING

Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

For example: a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.

b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.

c. If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.

d. If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal operation.

e. If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

f . When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.

19. REPLACEMENT PARTS

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

20. SAFETY CHECK

Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

21. HEAT

The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

22. DISC TRAY

Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.

23. CONNECTING

When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.

Introduction

Precautions

Notes on handling

When shipping the DVD/VCR, the original shipping carton and packing materials come in handy. For maximum protection, repack the unit as it was originally packed at the factory.

Do not use volatile liquids, such as insect spray, near the DVD/VCR. Do not leave rubber or plastic products to contact the DVD/VCR for a prolonged period. They will leave marks on the finish.

The top and rear panels of the DVD/VCR may become warm after a long period of use. This is not a malfunction.

When the DVD/VCR is not in use, be sure to remove the disc and the video cassette turn off the power.

If you do not use the DVD/VCR for a long period, the unit may not function properly in the future. Turn on and use the DVD/VCR occasionally.

Notes on locating

Place the DVD/VCR on a level surface. Do not use it on a shaky or unstable surface such as a wobbling table or inclined stand. The loaded disc or the video tape may become dis-aligned and damage the DVD/

VCR.

When you place this DVD/VCR near a TV, radio, or

VCR, the playback picture may become poor and the sound may be distorted. In this case, place the DVD/

VCR away from the TV, radio, or VCR.

Notes on moisture condensation

Moisture condensation damages the DVD/VCR.

Please read the following carefully.

Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day. Drops of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way, moisture may condense on the head drum or the optical pick-up lens inside this unit, one of the most crucial internal parts of the DVD/VCR.

Exam ple of moisture condensation!

Tape

Head drum

Moisture condensation occurs during the following cases.

When you bring the DVD/VCR directly from a cold place to a warm place.

When you use the DVD/VCR in a room where you just turned on the heater, or a place where the cold wind from the air conditioner directly hits the unit.

In summer, when you use the DVD/VCR in a hot and humid place just after you move the unit from an air conditioned room.

When you use the DVD/VCR in a humid place.

It’s too warm!

Notes on cleaning

Use a soft, dry cloth for cleaning.

For stubborn dirt, soak the cloth in a weak detergent solution, wring well and wipe. Use a dry cloth to wipe it dry.

Do not use any type of solvent, such as thinner and benzine, as they may damage the surface of the

DVD/VCR.

If you use a chemical saturated cloth to clean the unit, follow that product’s instructions.

To obtain a clear picture

The DVD/VCR is a high technology, precision device. If the video head, the head drum, the optical pick-up lens or disc drive parts are dirty or worn down, the picture quality will deteriorate. To obtain a clear picture, we recommend regular inspection and maintenance

(cleaning or parts replacement) every 1,000 hours of use depending on the operating environment. For details, contact your nearest dealer.

Do not use the DVD/VCR when moisture condensation may occur.

If you use the DVD/VCR in such a situation, it may damage discs and internal parts. Remove the disc or the video tape, connect the power cord of the DVD/

VCR to the wall outlet, turn on the DVD/VCR, and leave it for two or three hours. After two or three hours, the DVD/VCR will have warmed up and evaporated any moisture. Keep the DVD/VCR connected to the wall outlet and moisture condensation will seldom occur.

Wait!

Wall outlet

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

/ Power source

24. LASER BEAM

Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the laser beam. It may cause sight damage.

25. DISC

Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal injury and product malfunction.

26. NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE

GROUND CLAMP

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

S2898A

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810-20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250, PART H)

Power source

Wider Hole and Blade

AC Outlet

Polarized AC Cord Plug

(One blade is wider than the other.)

TO USE AC POWER SOURCE

Use the AC polarized line cord provided for operation on AC. Insert the AC cord plug into a standard 120V 60Hz polarized AC outlet.

Notes:

• Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified voltage (120V 60Hz). Use the attached power cord only.

• If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC outlet, do not attempt to file or cut the blade. It is the user’s responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet.

• If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the unit fails to function, simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation.

Notes on discs

On handling discs

Do not touch the playback side of the disc.

Structure of disc contents

Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the titles are sub-divided into chapters. VIDEO CDs and audio CDs are divided into tracks.

DVD video disc

Title 1

Chapter 1 Chapter 2

DVD video disc

Title 2

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3

Do not attach paper or tape to discs.

Playback side

Video CD/Audio CD

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5

On cleaning discs

Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean.

Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track number” respectively.

There may be discs that do not have these numbers.

If you cannot wipe off the dust with a soft cloth, wipe the disc lightly with a slightly moistened soft cloth and finish with a dry cloth.

Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner, benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.

On storing discs

Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight or near heat sources.

Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.

Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing objects on discs outside of their case may cause warping.

Notes on copyright

It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast on cable, play in public, and rent copyrighted material without permission.

This device does not tape-record copy protected DVD

Video Discs.

The device is not to be used for copying copyrighted content without the express written permission of the copyright owner.

Obtaining such permission is the sole responsibility of the user.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain

U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision

Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Introduction

Notes on discs (continued)

About this owner’s manual

This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions of this DVD/VCR. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner that allows specific or limited operation during playback. As such, the DVD/VCR may not respond to all operating commands. This is not a defect in the DVD/

VCR. Refer to instruction notes of discs.

“ ” may appear on the TV screen during operation.

A “ ” means that the operation is not permitted by the

DVD/VCR or the disc.

For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the playback of copyright message of the disc when the

STOP ( 3 ) button is pressed. Alternatively, the “ ” may also indicate that the feature is not available for the disc.

Playable discs

This DVD/VCR can play the following discs.

Disc Mark Contents

Disc

Size

Maximum playback time

Approx. 4 hours

(single sided disc)

12 cm

DVD video discs

Audio

Video

(moving pictures)

Approx. 8 hours

(double sided disc)

Approx. 80 minutes

(single sided disc)

8 cm

Approx. 160 minutes

(double sided disc)

Notes on region numbers

The region number of this DVD/VCR is 1. If region numbers, which stand for their playable area, are printed on your DVD video disc and you do not find

ALL

, disc playback will not be allowed by the player. (In this case, the DVD/VCR will display a message on-screen.)

Video

CDs

DIGITAL VIDEO

Audio

Video

(moving pictures)

12 cm Approx. 74 minutes

8 cm Approx. 20 minutes

On Video CDs

This DVD/VCR supports Video CDs equipped with the

PBC (Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of

Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on types of discs.

• Video CD not equipped with PBC function

(Version 1.1)

Sound and movie can be played on this DVD/VCR in the same way as an audio CD.

• Video CD equipped with PBC function

(Version 2.0)

In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback).

Some of the functions described in this owner’s manual may not work with some discs.

12 cm Approx. 74 minutes

Audio

CDs

Audio

8 cm

(CD single)

Approx. 20 minutes

The following discs are also available.

DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format

CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD,

MP3, WMA or JPEG format

Kodak Picture CD and FUJICOLOR CD format

Some of these discs may be incompatible.

• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.

• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM,

Photo CD, etc., or non standardized discs even if they may be labeled as above.

• Some CD-R/RWs can not be played back depending on the recording conditions.

• This DVD/VCR uses the NTSC color system, and cannot play DVD video discs recorded in any other color system (PAL, SECAM, etc.).

Introduction

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .......................... 2

Power source ................................................... 5

Precautions ...................................................... 6

Notes on discs .................................................. 7

Contents. .......................................................... 9

Identification of controls ................................. 10

Connections

Antenna connections ...................................... 14

CATV (CABLE TV) connections ..................... 16

Connecting to a TV ........................................ 18

Connecting to optional equipment .................. 20

Basic setup

Setting the video channel ............................... 22

Setting the language ...................................... 23

Clock setting ................................................... 24

Tuner setting .................................................. 27

Playback (VCR)

Loading and unloading a cassette tape ......... 29

Cassette tape playback .................................. 30

Special playback ............................................ 31

Convenience function ..................................... 32

Recording (VCR)

Recording a TV program ................................ 34

One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) ................ 36

Timer recording .............................................. 37

Basic playback (DVD)

Playing a disc ................................................. 42

Advanced playback (DVD)

MP3/WMA/JPEG playback ............................ 45

Zooming ......................................................... 50

Locating desired scene .................................. 50

Marking desired scenes ................................. 51

Repeat playback ............................................ 52

A-B Repeat playback ..................................... 52

Program playback (CD) .................................. 53

Random playback (CD) .................................. 53

Changing angles ............................................ 54

Title selection ................................................. 54

DVD menu ...................................................... 54

Function setup (DVD)

Changing soundtrack language ..................... 55

Setting surround sound .................................. 55

Setting subtitles .............................................. 56

Karaoke playback ........................................... 56

E.B.L. (Enhanced Black Level) ...................... 57

Setting the aspect ratio of TV screen ............. 58

Setting on screen display ............................... 59

Status display of disc ..................................... 59

Dynamic Range Control ................................. 60

Parental control setting .................................. 61

To change the parental level .......................... 62

Temporary disabling of rating level by DVD disc .. 63

Setting OSD language ................................... 64

Setting language ............................................ 65

Selecting PROGRESSIVE scan ..................... 66

Other functions (VCR)

Stereo recording and playback ...................... 39

Second Audio Program (SAP) ........................ 39

Duplicating a video tape ................................. 40

Recording a DVD/CD disc .............................. 41

Others

Language code list ......................................... 67

Troubleshooting ............................................. 68

Specifications ................................................. 69

Limited warranty ............................................. 70

Introduction

Identification of controls

See the page in for details.

Front panel

VCR/DVD mode selector button 22

EJECT button 29

Cassette loading slot 29

DVD indicator

VCR indicator 22

42 OPEN/CLOSE button

Disc tray 42

ON/STANDBY button 22

AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO IN

(LINE IN 2) jacks 40

REC button 34 Remote sensor 13

Display window 11

CHANNEL

buttons 34

STOP button 30

PLAY button 30

FF (Fast Forward) button

REW (Rewind) button 30

Rear panel

When connecting the optical digital cable, remove the cap and fit the connector into the jack firmly.

When not using the jack, keep the cap inserted to protect it from dust intrusion.

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO

OUT jack (dust protection cap)

DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT jack 20

DVD/VCR common AUDIO

(L/R)/VIDEO OUT jacks 18

RF IN jack 14

DVD S-VIDEO

OUT jack 19

S-VIDEO/COMPONENT

Video selector switch

DVD AUDIO (L/R)

OUT jacks

DVD COMPONENT

OUT jacks 19

AC power cord 5

AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO

IN (LINE IN1) jacks 40

RF OUT jack 14

Display window

Play indicator

VCR indicator (VCR) Still indicator Disc inserted indicator (DVD)

Recording indicator (VCR)

Disc inserted indicator (CD)

AM/PM indicator

(AM is not displayed)

Track indicator (CD)

Tape loaded indicator (VCR)

Multifunctional indicator

Progressive indicator

Timer Recording indicator (VCR)

VCR operation status

Press CALL to display information on screen.

To cancel the display, press CALL again.

While watching TV

DAY OF THE WEEK

CLOCK

8 : 47AM MON

STEREO SAP

CH 125 CHANNEL

STEREO AND

SECOND

AUDIO

PROGRAM

(SAP)

00 : 00 : 00 SP TAPE SPEED

While operating a tape

HI-FI STEREO

8 : 30AM MON

HI-FI

STEREO 00 : 15 : 12 SP

VCR Icons

Recording :

OPERATING

MODE

AUTO REPEAT

TAPE IN

Rec/Pause :

Play :

Stop :

Eject :

REAL TIME COUNTER OUTPUT SELECTION

DVD/CD/VCD operation status

Each press of DISPLAY, the status display of the disc will appear on the screen and change as follows.

DVD DISC OPERATION

TITLE NO.

ELAPSED

TIME

00:34:56 01:12:33

TOTAL

TIME

Title

1/8

1/32

1/99

00:34:56 01:12:33

Chapter 1/999

Eng DolbyDigital

1/9

Eng

ANGLE NO.

CHAPTER NO.

A KIND OF AUDIO

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

CD/VCD

DISC

OPERATION

TRACK NO.

Track 11/99

34:56 71:33

TOTAL

TIME

ELAPSED TIME

Introduction

Identification of Controls (continued)

The instructions in this manual describe the functions on the remote control. See the page in for details.

Remote control

CALL button 24

DISPLAY button 59

VCR DVD selector button 22

Direct channel selection buttons 28

Number buttons 45

INPUT SELECT button 40

PROGRESSIVE button 66

TV/VCR button 22

COUNTER RESET button

ANGLE button 54

SP/SLP button 34

PLAY MODE button 52

REC button

OTR button

TIMER REC button 37

PLAY button 30

REW button 30

SLOW button 31

MARKER button 51

ZERO RETURN button

JUMP button 50

VCR MENU button 23

SETUP button 47

Direction buttons 45

( / / / )

SET +/- buttons 23

Channel +/– buttons 34

CANCEL button 37

VCR

DVD

CALL

DISPLAY

EJECT

OPEN/CLOSE

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

8 9 0

TV/VCR

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO

ATR

SUBTITLE

COUNTER RESET

ANGLE

SP/SLP

PLAY MODE A-B RPT CLOCK/COUNTER

REC/OTR TIMER REC

–

INDEX

SKIP

INDEX

SKIP

PLAY

REW

SLOW

FWD

STOP

PAUSE/STILL

ZERO RETURN

JUMP MARKER TOP MENU RETURN

VCR MENU

SETUP SET + MENU

CM SKIP

ZOOM

CH + CH –

CANCEL

ENTER

SET –

Power ( ) button 22

EJECT button (VCR) 29

OPEN/CLOSE button (DVD) 42

ATR button 31

SUBTITLE button 56

AUDIO SELECT button

AUDIO button 55

CLOCK/COUNTER button 33

INDEX + button 33

SKIP button 44

A-B RPT button 52

INDEX – button 33

SKIP button 44

FWD button 30

STOP button 30

PAUSE/STILL button 31

TOP MENU button 54

RETURN button 58

CM SKIP button

ZOOM button

*MENU button 54

ENTER button 23

Inserting batteries

1 Slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow.

2 Install two “R03/AAA” batteries

(supplied), paying attention to the polarity diagram in the battery compartment.

3 Replace the compartment cover.

Battery precautions

The precautions below should be followed when using batteries in this device:

1. Use only the size and type of batteries specified.

2. Be sure to follow the correct polarity when installing the batteries as indicated in the battery compartment. Reversed batteries may cause damage to the device. To avoid a potential short circuit, insert the “–” end first.

3. Do not mix different types of batteries together (e.g. Alkaline and Carbon-zinc) or old batteries with fresh ones.

4. If the device is not to be used for a long period of time, remove the batteries to prevent damage or injury from possible battery leakage.

5. Do not try to recharge batteries not intended to be recharged; they can overheat and rupture. (Follow battery manufacturer’s directions.)

Remote control basics

• Press POWER ( ) to turn the DVD VCR on or off.

• Select your desired operating mode (DVD or VCR) using VCR DVD.

(DVD or VCR indicator on the front panel will show you which mode is selected.)

• Press CH + or CH – to move through the channels one channel at a time.

• The CH +/– ( / ) and SET +/– ( / ) are also used to navigate on-screen menu system.

• You can directly access specific channels using Number buttons.

• Each press of VCR DVD on the remote control, switches the screen between the VCR screen (VCR mode) and the

DVD screen (DVD mode).

Operation

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to operate.

• Operate the remote control within 30

angle on either side of the remote sensor, up to a distance of Approx. 7 meters.

Approx. 7 meters

* MENU button

Use the MENU button to display the menu included on many DVD video discs. To operate a menu, follow the instructions in “DVD Menu.” 54

Connections

Antenna connections

If you are using an antenna system, follow these instructions. If you are a cable (CATV) subscriber, skip ahead to page 16 for the proper connections.

Antenna to DVD/VCR connection

The DVD/VCR must be connected “between” the antenna and the TV. First, disconnect the antenna from the TV and connect it to the DVD/VCR. Then connect the DVD/VCR to the TV. Below are 3 common methods of connecting an antenna system to a DVD/VCR. Find the type of antenna system you are using and follow the connection diagram.

1 Combination VHF/UHF Antenna with 75 ohm Coaxial Cable

DVD/VCR

75 ohm Coaxial Cable

(ANT)

OUT

(TV)

2 Combination VHF/UHF Antenna with 300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire

DVD/VCR

Matching Transformer 300 ohm Input 75 ohm output (not supplied)

(ANT)

OUT

(TV)

300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire

(not supplied)

Separate VHF and UHF Antennas

DVD/VCR 3

VHF

UHF

Combiner 75/300 ohm Inputs 75 ohm output

(not supplied)

300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire

(not supplied)

(ANT)

OUT

(TV)

75 ohm Coaxial Cable

Note: If both VHF and UHF antennas have 300 ohm twin lead (flat) wires, use a combiner having two 300 ohm inputs and one 75 ohm output.

Notes: • A clear picture will not be obtained by the DVD/VCR unless the antenna signal is good. Connect the antenna to the DVD/VCR properly.

• For better quality recording, an indoor antenna or a telescopic antenna is not recommended. The use of an outdoor type antenna is required.

• If you are not sure about the connection, please refer to qualified service personnel.

DVD/VCR to TV connection

After you have connected the antenna to the DVD/VCR, you must connect the DVD/VCR to the TV.

Below are 3 common methods of connecting your DVD/VCR to a TV. Find the type of TV you are using and follow the connection diagram.

This DVD/VCR has a single 75 ohm output for connection to a TV. If your TV has separate VHF and UHF antenna inputs (numbers 2 and 3 below), use a splitter to connect the DVD/VCR to the TV for VHF and UHF reception.

75 ohm Coaxial Cable (supplied)

VHF/UHF IN

Note: If a VHF or UHF antenna is used, set the TV/CATV menu option to the “TV” mode.

TV with single 75 ohm VHF/UHF antenna input

75 ohm Coaxial Cable

(supplied)

Splitter 75 ohm Input

75/300 ohm outputs

(not supplied)

75 ohm Coaxial Cable

(supplied)

Splitter 75 ohm Input

300 ohm outputs

(not supplied)

UHF

VHF

Note: If a VHF or UHF antenna is used, set the TV/CATV menu option to the “TV” mode.

TV with 300 ohm UHF and 75 ohm VHF antenna inputs

UHF

VHF

Note: If a VHF or UHF antenna is used, set the TV/CATV menu option to the “TV” mode.

TV with 300 ohm UHF and 300 ohm VHF antenna inputs

Connections

CATV (CABLE TV) connections

Many cable companies offer services permitting reception of extra channels including pay or subscription channels. This

DVD/VCR has an extended tuning range and can be tuned to most cable channels without using a cable company supplied converter box, except for those premium channels which are intentionally scrambled. If you subscribe to a premium channel which is scrambled, you must have a descrambler box for proper reception.

DVD/VCR

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT) Incoming Cable

(ANT)

OUT

(TV)

Allows: * Recording of nonscrambled channels.

* Use of the programmable timer.

* Recording of one channel while watching another.

DVD/VCR

Converter/

Descrambler

Incoming

Cable

(ANT)

OUT

(TV)

Allows: * Recording of channels through the converter box

(scrambled and unscrambled).

* Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.

Prevents: * Recording one channel while watching another.

* Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

Note:

To record from converter/descrambler,

DVD/VCR tuner must be tuned to the converter output channel, usually channel 3 or 4.

DVD/VCR 3

Incoming Cable

(ANT)

OUT

(TV)

Converter/Descrambler

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

Allows: * Recording of nonscrambled channels.

* Use of the programmable timer.

* Recording an unscrambled channel while watching any channel selected at the converter box.

Prevents: Recording scrambled channels.

Note:

If you are playing a tape or using the tuner built into the DVD/VCR, the converter must be set to the video channel output of the

DVD/VCR (either 3 or 4).

Note: Whenever a Converter/Descrambler box is placed before the DVD/VCR, you must tune the DVD/VCR to the output of the Converter/Descrambler box, usually channel 3 or 4.

Connections

Connecting to a TV

Connect the DVD/VCR to your TV.

Note: This method transports VHS and DVD-video signals. For enhanced DVD-video performance, we recommend you

also connect the S-video or ColorStream ® component video outputs to your TV/monitor. (See page 19.)

Connecting to a TV

Signal flow

To wall outlet

(yellow) (red) (white)

To ANALOG AUDIO OUT

To VIDEO

OUT

Audio/video cable (supplied)

To video input

(yellow)

To audio inputs

(red) (white)

TV or monitor with audio/video inputs

Notes:

• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected TV as well.

• When you connect the DVD/VCR to your TV, be sure to turn off the power and unplug both units from the wall outlet before making any connections.

• If your television set has one audio input, connect the left and right audio outputs of the DVD/VCR to a Y cable adapter (not supplied) and then connect to your TV.

• Connect the DVD/VCR directly to your TV. If you connect the DVD/VCR to a VCR, TV/VCR combination or video selector, the playback picture may be distorted as DVD video discs are copy protected.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the TV/CATV menu option is set to the “CATV” mode.

This DVD/VCR cannot receive scrambled programs since it does not contain a descrambler. In order to receive scrambled programs, your existing descrambler must be used. Descrambler boxes are available from cable companies. Consult your local cable company for more information concerning connection to their descrambler equipment. There are many ways to connect your DVD/VCR to a cable system. Below are six common methods of connection.

DVD/VCR

Splitter

Incoming Cable

Converter/Descrambler

(ANT)

OUT

(TV)

A/B Switch

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

Allows: * Recording of one channel while watching another.

* Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.

* Recording of all channels through the converter box.

Prevents: * Watching scrambled channels while recording another channel.

* Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.

5 DVD/VCR

Splitter

(ANT)

OUT

(TV)

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

Incoming Cable

Converter/Descrambler

A/B Switch

Allows: * Recording of nonscrambled channels.

* Recording of one channel while watching another.

* Watching premium channels through the converter while recording nonscrambled channels.

* Using the programmable timer.

Prevents: Recording scrambled channels.

DVD/VCR

Splitter

Converter/Descrambler

(ANT)

OUT

(TV)

VHF/UHF

IN (ANT)

Incoming Cable

Converter/Descrambler

A/B Switch

Allows: * Recording of all channels through the converter box.

* Recording a scrambled or unscrambled channel while watching another (scrambled or unscrambled) channel.

* Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.

Prevents: Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.

S-video output/input

An S-Video connection is superior to Video (Yellow) output. Use this method for DVD playback when the connected television has S-

Video input, and does not have component video inputs.

Component video outputs/inputs

PROGRESSIVE outputs/inputs

Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs that are capable of reproducing a progressively scanned video signal. Connecting to these inputs allows you to view the highest quality pictures with less flicker.

INTERLACED outputs/inputs

Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs. Connecting to these inputs allows you to enjoy the highest quality

DVD picture playback.

Notes:

• Actual labels for component video inputs may vary depending on the TV manufacturer. (ex. Y, R-Y, B-Y or Y, CB, CR)

• In some TVs or monitors, the color levels of the playback picture may be reduced slightly or the tint may change. In such a case, adjust the TV or monitor for optimum performance.

Connecting to an audio system and TV equipped with S-video input/component video inputs

Note: The S-video output and component video output transports the DVD-video signal exclusively and will deliver enhanced DVD video picture performance.

Signal flow

(white) To ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

(red)

To S-

VIDEO

OUT

To P

VIDEO

OUT

To P

VIDEO

OUT

To Y

VIDEO

To wall outlet

OUT

When you make this connection, set the S-VIDEO/

COMPONENT Video selector switch to the desired position.

And also you must select the corresponding video input on your TV.

Component video cable (not supplied)

Audio cable (not supplied)

To audio inputs of the amplifier

To Y video input

(red) (white)

To P B/ C B video input

To P R/ C R video input

To S-video input

S-video cable (not supplied)

If you connect the DVD/VCR to your TV with the DVD OUT jacks, select the corresponding video input on your television to watch DVD video discs.

TV or monitor with

ColorStream ® component video inputs

Audio system

Notes:

• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the DVD/VCR to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet before making any connections.

• If you place the DVD/VCR near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the DVD/

VCR away from the tuner and radio.

• The output sound of the DVD/VCR has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver’s volume to a moderate listening level. Otherwise, the speakers may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.

• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the DVD/VCR’s power cord. If you leave the amplifier power on, the speakers may be damaged.

• When connecting to a TV using the Video or S-video jack, make sure that the Progressive indicator “ ” on the display window is not lit. If it is lit, the Video and S-video outputs do not feed the correct signals and you cannot see any picture. To turn off the Progressive indicator, select PROGRESSIVE scan Off (see page 66).

Connections

Connecting to optional equipment

You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds of DVD video discs or audio CDs by connecting the DVD/VCR to optional audio equipment.

For connection to your TV, see “Connecting to a TV” 18 19 .

• This selection uses the following reference mark.

: Front speaker

: Rear speaker

: Sub woofer

: Center speaker

: Signal flow

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is now available to reproduce this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs with this dynamic realistic sound by connecting the

DVD/VCR to a 6 channel amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, you will obtain the full benefit of

Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks, as well as from titles with the Dolby Surround mark.

Manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” “Pro

Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• Use DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital recording system.

Amplifier equipped with a

Dolby Digital decoder

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

To OPTICAL type digital audio input

Optical digital cable

Ω

coaxial cable

Connect either.

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with Dolby Surround Pro Logic

Dolby Surround Pro Logic

You can enjoy the dynamic realistic sound of Dolby Surround Pro Logic by connecting an amplifier and speaker system (right and left front speakers, a center speaker, and one or two rear speakers).

With an amplifier equipped with Dolby Digital

Connect the equipment the same way as described in “Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder.” Refer to that amplifier’s owner’s manual and set the amplifier so you can enjoy Dolby Surround Pro Logic sound.

With an amplifier not equipped with Dolby Digital

Connect the equipment as follows.

• This connectin is only suitable for Video CDs and Audio CDs.

* Amplifier equipped with

Dolby Surround Pro Logic

* Connect one or two rear speakers.

The output sound from the rear speakers will be monaural even if you connect two rear speakers.

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

To OPTICAL type digital audio input

Optical digital cable

Ω

coaxial cable

Connect either.

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a DTS decoder

Digital Theater Systems (DTS)

DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use, on DVD video discs or audio CDs.

If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full benefit of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD video discs or audio CDs.

Amplifier equipped with a

DTS decoder

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,

Inc.

• Use DVD video discs or audio

CDs encoded via the DTS recording system.

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

To OPTICAL type digital audio input

Optical digital cable

75 Ω coaxial cable

Connect either.

Basic setup

Setting the video channel

When a TV is connected with the 75 ohm coaxial cable only.

To view playback of a recorded tape or DVD disc, or to watch a program selected by the VCR's channel selector, the TV must be set to channel 3 or 4 (video channel).

POWER

TV/VCR

VCR DVD

Setting the video channel

1 Press and hold 3 or 4 on the remote for 3 seconds in standby mode.

The video channel will start to flash for 3 seconds in the display window.

2 Press POWER to turn on the DVD/VCR.

For a push-button TV tuner

If CH 3 or 4 corresponding to the video channel cannot be tuned on your TV, proceed as follows: set the VCR

3/4 channel selector and the TV to CH 3 or 4, play back a prerecorded tape and tune the TV to receive a sharp color picture from the video cassette recorder.

Refer to your TV owner's manual for details.

Note:

If the unit does not operate properly, or No key operation

(by the unit and/or the remote control): Static electricity, etc., may affect the player's operation. Disconnect the AC power cord once, then connect it again.

3 Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

VCR

DVD

The VCR indicator on the front panel will light.

4 Turn ON the TV and set to CH 3 or 4 to correspond with the channel selected in step 1.

5 Press TV/VCR to select the VCR position.

TV/VCR

The VCR indicator will appear in the display window.

6 Select any channel to receive a TV station in your area.

The channel number will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.

Warning

When playing DTS-encoded discs (audio CDs), excessive noise may be output from the analog stereo jacks. To avoid possible damage to the audio system, you should take proper precautions when the ANALOG AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks of the

DVD/VCR are connected to an amplification system. (Do not leave the ANALOG AUDIO OUT (L/R) wires dangling.) To enjoy

DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external 5.1 channel DTS Digital Surround™ decoder system must be connected to the

BITSTREAM/PCM AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR.

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder

MPEG2 sound

You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs with dynamic realistic sound by connecting an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.

• Use DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system.

Amplifier equipped with an

MPEG2 audio decoder

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

To OPTICAL type digital audio input

Optical digital cable

Ω

coaxial cable

Connect either.

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input

2 channel digital stereo

You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input and speaker system (right and left front speakers).

Amplifier equipped with a digital audio input

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

To OPTICAL type digital audio input

Optical digital cable

Ω

coaxial cable

Connect either.

Notes:

• DO NOT connect the BITSTREAM/PCM AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital Receiver.

This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the BITSTREAM/PCM AUDIO

OUT jack of the DVD/VCR.

• Connect the BITSTREAM/PCM AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the “OPTICAL” or “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or

Processor.

• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the DVD/VCR to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet before making any connections.

• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the DVD/VCR’s power cord. If you leave the amplifier power on, the speakers may be damaged.

VCR DVD

Setting the language

You can choose from three different languages (English,

French and Spanish) for the on-screen displays.

1,4

1–3

Setting the language

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding video input.

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

4 Press VCR MENU until the MENU screen is cleared.

VCR MENU

SETUP

1 Press VCR MENU.

The VCR menu screen will appear.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM

SETUP”, then press ENTER.

If you use the unit for the first time and press VCR MENU, instead of the main menu screen the “SYSTEM SETUP” menu screen in step 2 may appear.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

Notes:

• Both the VCR and the DVD have their own player menus 57 .

• If no buttons are pressed for more than 60 seconds, the VCR

MENU screen will return to normal TV-operation automatically.

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

2 Press SET + or – to select “LANGUAGE”, then press ENTER.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

SYSTEM SETUP

CLOCK SET

LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE

NO NOISE BACKGROUND

ON OFF

STANDARD TIME

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

3 Press SET + or – to select the desired language:

English (ENGLISH), Spanish (ESPAÑOL) or

French (FRANCAIS), then press ENTER.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

Basic setup

Clock setting

The AUTO CLOCK function will automatically set the built-in clock

(Month, Day, Year and Time) when the DVD/VCR is connected to an

Antenna or Cable system and it is turned off. The DVD/VCR searches for a station in your area containing the necessary AUTO CLOCK setting signals. Once received, it will take approximately 4 minutes for the clock to set itself automatically.

AUTO CLOCK setting

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

Connect the Antenna or Cable system.

• If you use a cable box, turn it on.

Plug the AC Power cord to the AC outlet.

Make sure the DVD/VCR is turned off.

• If you press POWER, the Auto Clock

set is not programmed.

4 Wait at least three minutes and press

POWER.

1,5

2,4

2,3

To set AUTO CLOCK to off

When shipped from factory the AUTO CLOCK is set to “ON”.

But if you do not want AUTO CLOCK setting:

1 Press VCR MENU.

VCR MENU

SETUP

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

CALL

POWER

VCR DVD

Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”, then press ENTER.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

5 Press CALL to check the clock setting on the on screen display.

CALL

DISPLAY

8 : 47AM MON

STEREO SAP

CH 125

3 Press SET + or – to select “AUTO CLOCK”.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

SYSTEM SETUP

CLOCK SET

LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE

NO NOISE BACKGROUND

AUTO CLOCK

STANDARD TIME

ON OFF

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

00 : 00 : 00 SP

6 If the clock is not set, check the antenna condition. The AUTO CLOCK may not function properly if the reception condition is not good.

4 Press ENTER to select “OFF”.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

SYSTEM SETUP

CLOCK SET

LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE

NO NOISE BACKGROUND

AUTO CLOCK

STANDARD TIME

ON OFF

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

AUTO CLOCK adjustment

The auto clock adjustment will be updated at 6:00

AM, 12:00 PM and 6:00 PM everyday when the

DVD/VCR turned off.

• If you use a cable box and you want AUTO CLOCK adjustment to be performed, the cable box must be left on.

• The AUTO CLOCK adjustment is not effective when there is a difference of more than 5 minutes exists between the built-in clock time and the actual time.

5 Press VCR MENU repeatedly to return to the normal screen.

VCR MENU

SETUP

• When the AUTO CLOCK is set to

“OFF”, the AUTO CLOCK adjustment does not function.

• Set the clock manually 26 .

Basic setup

Clock setting (continued)

If the AUTO CLOCK process did not set the date and time correctly, you must set them manually for timer recording and DAYLIGHT

SAVING TIME.

2–4

CANCEL

2–4

Manual clock setting

EXAMPLE: Setting the clock to “8:30 AM” March,

27 (SAT), 2004.

1 Press VCR MENU.

VCR MENU

SETUP

6 After setting the clock, date and time starts functioning automatically.

8 : 30AM SAT

2 Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”, then press ENTER.

CH –

SET +

CH +

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

ENTER

SET –

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

3 Press SET + or – to select “CLOCK SET”, then press ENTER.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

SYSTEM SETUP

CLOCK SET

LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE

NO NOISE BACKGROUND

AUTO CLOCK

STANDARD TIME

ON OFF

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

4 Press SET + or – to set the month, then press

ENTER.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

MONTH

DAY

YEAR

1 (MON)

2004

TIME 12 : 00AM

⟨

+/–/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU

⟩

To make corrections any time during the process

Press CANCEL repeatedly until the item you want to change blinks, then press SET + or –.

Note:

After a power failure or disconnection of the power, the timer settings will be lost. In this case, reset the present time.

5 Set the day, year and time as in step 4.

MONTH 3

DAY

YEAR

27 (SAT)

2004

TIME 8 : 30AM

+/–/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU

To set STANDARD TIME To set DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

In the rare event that you live within broadcast range of two stations in two different time zones, the DVD/VCR may recognize the wrong station for the AUTO CLOCK setting.

To correct the situation:

1 Press VCR MENU.

VCR MENU

SETUP

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

You can set the DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME automatically or manually.

1 Press VCR MENU.

Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”, then press ENTER.

VCR MENU

SETUP

SET +

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

2 Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”, then press ENTER.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

2 Press SET + or – to select “DAYLIGHT

SAVING TIME”, then press ENTER.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

SYSTEM SETUP

CLOCK SET

LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE

NO NOISE BACKGROUND

AUTO CLOCK

STANDARD TIME

ON OFF

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

3 Press SET + or – to select “STANDARD TIME”, then press ENTER.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

SYSTEM SETUP

CLOCK SET

LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE

NO NOISE BACKGROUND

AUTO CLOCK

STANDARD TIME

ON OFF

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

3 Press SET + or – to select one of the options, then press ENTER. Press VCR

MENU until the MENU screen is cleared.

CH –

Press SET + or – to select your time zone, then press ENTER.

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

ATLANTIC : GMT–4hours

EASTERN : GMT–5hours

CENTRAL : GMT–6hours

MOUNTAIN : GMT–7hours

PACIFIC : GMT–8hours

ALASKA

HAWAII

: GMT–9hours

: GMT–10hours

AUTO : AUTO SET

(GMT: Greenwich Mean Time)

CH –

VCR MENU

SETUP

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

ON:

OFF:

AUTO: for manual setting

(forward one hour) for manual setting

(back one hour) for automatic setting

(read XDS in the signal)

When you want to set the DAYLIGHT

SAVING TIME manually, on the first

Sunday in April you set to “ON”, and on the last Sunday in October you set to “OFF”.

5 Press VCR MENU twice to return to the normal screen.

VCR MENU

SETUP

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

OFF

AUTO

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

Notes:

• To be able to select the standard time, the clock must first be set by AUTO CLOCK once.

• If you live in Newfoundland and the AUTO CLOCK does not function properly, set the AUTO CLOCK menu option to “OFF” and set the clock manually.

Notes:

• When shipped from factory, the DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME is set to “AUTO” position.

• When the clock is not set, DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME setting is not available.

• When there is no DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME in your area, always select “OFF” position in step 3.

Tuner setting

This DVD/VCR is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory, skipping over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must be programmed into the DVD/VCR’s memory. In addition to normal

VHF and UHF channels, this DVD/VCR can receive up to 113 Cable

TV channels. To use this DVD/VCR with an antenna, set the TV/CATV menu option to the TV mode. When shipped from the factory, this menu option is in the CATV mode.

TV/CATV selection

VCR DVD

1,4

1,3

1,2

Setting channels automatically

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding video input.

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

1 Press VCR MENU. Press SET + or – to select

“CH SETUP”, then press ENTER.

VCR MENU

SETUP

SET +

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

2 Press SET + or – to select “TV/CATV”.

SET +

CH SETUP

TV CATV

AUTO CH MEMORY

ADD/DELETE CH –

ENTER

CH +

SET –

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

3 Press ENTER to select the TV or CATV mode.

The arrow indicates the selected mode.

SET +

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

CH SETUP

TV CATV

AUTO CH MEMORY

ADD/DELETE

TV - VHF/UHF channels

CATV - CABLE TV channels á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

4 Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.

VCR MENU

SETUP

1 Repeat left step 1 and press SET + or – to select “AUTO CH MEMORY”.

CH –

SET +

CH +

CH SETUP

TV CATV

AUTO CH MEMORY

ADD/DELETE

ENTER

SET –

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

2 Press ENTER.

Auto tuning will begin. The channel display will count up and when finished, the screen returns to normal.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

CH 002

Note:

You can’t select “CH SETUP” if you set the channel to “L1” or

“L2”.

Basic setup

Tuner setting (continued)

NUMBER BUTTONS

To ADD/DELETE channels

1 Repeat the step 1 on page 27. Then press SET + or – to select the “ADD/DELETE” and press

ENTER.

CH SETUP

SET +

TV CATV

AUTO CH MEMORY

ADD/DELETE

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

+/-/ENTER/MENU

2 To Add or Delete desired channels

Press Number buttons or SET + or – to select a channel number you want to add or delete.

2 To add channels

Press ENTER until “ADD” appears on the screen.

To delete channels

Press ENTER until “DELETE” appears on the screen. The channel number will blink.

SET +

9 0

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

1,2

Noise elimination

When you don't want to receive a weak signal broadcast, a

Blue back screen can be obtained by selecting the NO NOISE

BACKGROUND “ON”. When the unit is shipped from the factory, the NO NOISE BACKGROUND is set to “ON”.

1 Repeat the steps 1~2 on page 26 and press

SET + or – to select “NO NOISE

BACKGROUND”.

SET +

SYSTEM SETUP

CLOCK SET

LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE

NO NOISE BACKGROUND

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

STANDARD TIME

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

2 Press ENTER to select “ON” or “OFF” position.

SET + SYSTEM SETUP

CLOCK SET

LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE

NO NOISE BACKGROUND

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

STANDARD TIME

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

3 Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.

VCR MENU

SETUP

3 Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Playback (VCR)

Loading and unloading a cassette tape

Use only video cassette tapes marked and .

EJECT

Loading

Push the center of the tape until it is automatically inserted.

Insert the cassette tape with its labeled side facing up and the erase prevention tab positioned at your left. An inverted cassette tape cannot be inserted.

Erase prevention tab

Automatic power ON

When you insert a cassette tape the DVD/VCR power will turn ON automatically.

Automatic playback

When loading a cassette tape without an erase prevention tab, playback will start automatically.

Unloading

1 Press EJECT on the front panel or on the Remote.

2 Remove the cassette tape.

Automatic tape eject

This DVD/VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended. Once the tape is rewound to its beginning, the cassette tape will be ejected automatically.

To prevent accidental erasure

Remove the erase prevention tab with a screwdriver.

Screwdriver

To record again

Cover the hole with a piece of adhesive tape.

Erase prevention tab

Tape speed and maximum recording time

Tape Speed

SP (Standard Play)

SLP (Super Long Play)

T-160

2-2/3 hours

8 hours

Adhesive tape

T-120

2 hours

6 hours

Video cassette tape

T-90

1-1/2 hours

4-1/2 hours

T-60

1 hour

3 hours

T-30

30 minutes

1-1/2 hours

29 28

Playback (VCR)

Cassette tape playback

To play a prerecorded tape.

VCR DVD

REW

PLAY

FWD

STOP

Playback

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light).

1 Load a prerecorded tape

(When loading a cassette tape without the erase prevention tab, playback will start automatically).

Rewind or forward the tape

Stop the playback or recording via STOP on remote.

To rewind the tape:

Press REW.

REW

2 To start playback

Press PLAY.

Playback will start. “ ” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.

PLAY

To forward the tape:

Press FWD.

FWD

To stop playback

Press STOP once.

The tape will stop but remain fully loaded and ready to play.

“ ” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.

To discontinue the tape-winding, press STOP. To switch to playback directly (without STOP), press PLAY.

Forward/Reverse picture search mode

When the tape is being winded, you can switch to picture search mode (see next page). To do this, press REW or

FWD and hold it down. The unit will resume the tape advance or rewinding as soon as the button is released.

Notes:

• This VCR selects the playback tape speed SP, LP or SLP automatically.

• The Cassette tape and DVD disc can be played back simultaneously. If you press VCR DVD selector, the tape playback and DVD playback alternate with each other on the screen

(via CH3, 4 or video connection).

Special playback

Picture search

Reverse picture search function

Press REW once or twice during playback.

Forward picture search function

Press FWD once or twice during playback.

To return to playback, press PLAY.

SPEED SEARCH TIMES

TAPE SPEED

SP (Standard Play)

LP (Long Play)

SLP (Super Long Play)

PICTURE SEARCH SPEED

PRESS ONCE PRESS TWICE

3 X

7 X

5 X

9 X

9 X 15 X

SLOW

ATR

REW

PLAY

FWD

PAUSE/STILL

CM SKIP

SET +/–

Adjusting tracking condition

Automatic tracking adjustment

Whenever you insert a tape and start playback, the automatic tracking feature continuously analyzes the signal to enable optimum picture quality during playback.

Manual tracking adjustment

If automatic tracking cannot eliminate noises well during playback, press SET +/– to eliminate the noise. “MANUAL

TR.” will appear on the screen. Press it briefly for a fine adjustment, or press and hold for a coarse adjustment.

Press ATR to reactivate automatic tracking again.

“AUTO TR.” will appear on the screen.

Still picture

Press PAUSE/STILL during playback.

To resume normal playback, press PLAY or PAUSE/STILL.

Slow motion

During playback press SLOW.

To return to playback, press PLAY or SLOW.

Slow tracking and vertical lock adjustment

If noise bars appear in the picture during slow motion, press the SET + /– to reduce the noise bars.

If the still picture jitters excessively, press SET +/– to stabilize the still picture.

Frame by frame picture

Press PAUSE/STILL during playback.

Press SLOW repeatedly: The picture advances frame by frame.

To return to playback, press PLAY or PAUSE/STILL.

CM skip

Press CM SKIP during playback. The DVD/VCR will search forward through approximately 30 seconds of the tape (e.g.

unwanted commercial time) for each press of CM SKIP

(maximum six presses) and then resume normal playback.

For example : 1 press: 30 seconds of tape

2 press: 60 seconds of tape

3 press: 90 seconds of tape

AUTO TR.

Notes:

• The audio output is muted during SPEED SEARCH, STILL,

FRAME ADVANCE and SLOW MOTION.

• During picture search mode there will be noise bars. This is not a defect.

• Playback will commence after approx. 5 minutes to protect the video tape against excessive wear during pause mode.

Video head cleaning

Video head clogging

The video heads are the means by which the DVD/VCR reads the picture from the tape during playback. In the unlikely event that the heads become dirty enough to be clogged, no picture will be displayed. This can easily be determined if, during playback of a

Good Picture known good tape, there is good sound, but no picture (picture is extremely snowy). If this is the case, have the

DVD/VCR checked and cleaned by qualified service personnel.

Snowy Picture

Notes:

• DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE VIDEO HEADS OR

SERVICE THE UNIT BY REMOVING THE REAR COVER.

• Video heads may eventually wear out and should be replaced when they fail to produce clear pictures.

• To help prevent video head clogging, use only good quality VHS tapes. Discard worn out tapes.

Playback (VCR)

Convenience function

CALL

COUNTER RESET

CLOCK/COUNTER

VCR MENU

PLAY

STOP

ZERO RETURN

ENTER

SET +/–

Zero return function

This function rewinds the tape to the “00:00:00” counter position automatically.

Repeat playback

The entire video tape will play until its end. The tape will automatically rewind to the beginning and the playback will be repeated.

1 Press VCR MENU.

Press SET + or – to select “AUTO

REPEAT”.

VCR MENU

SETUP

CH –

SET +

CH +

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

ENTER

SET –

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

1 Press CLOCK/COUNTER.

The counter display shows the tape running time during playback or recording.

CLOCK/COUNTER

CH –

Press ENTER to select “ON” or “OFF”.

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

If “ON” is selected, the playback will be repeated endlessly.

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

2 Press COUNTER RESET at the desired tape position.

The counter display will be reset to

“00:00:00” position (e.g. the beginning of recording).

COUNTER RESET

ANGLE

3 Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.

If you press CALL, “

appear on the screen

” will

11 .

3 Press STOP when playback or recording is completed.

Press ZERO RETURN.

The tape will automatically rewind or fast forward to the “00:00:00” counter position.

4 To commence playback, press PLAY.

The playback will be repeated

endlessly.

PLAY

ZERO RETURN

JUMP

To cancel repeat mode:

Follow the above step 1, then press ENTER to select

“OFF” position. Press VCR MENU to return to the TV.

Recording (VCR)

Recording a TV program

Recording and viewing the same TV program.

VCR DVD

Recording a TV program

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding video input.

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

1 Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.

The DVD/VCR will automatically turn on.

4 Press Number button or CH +/– to select the channel to be recorded.

SET +

9 0

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

CH 110

Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed

SP or SLP.

The tape counter and “SP” or “SLP” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.

SP/SLP

PLAY MODE

00 : 00 : 00 SP

Select “TV” or “CATV” to the appropriate position 27 .

TV - VHF/UHF channels

CATV - CABLE TV channels

TV mode direct channel selection:

All channels can be instantly selected by using two buttons. (for example, to select channel 2, press “0”, then

“2”. If you press only “2”, channel selection will be delayed for two seconds.) For channels 10 and above, press the 2 digits in order.

CATV mode direct channel selection:

1-9 Press 0 twice and then 1-9 as required.

10-12

Example: To select “2”, Press 002.

Press 0 first and then the remaining 2 digits in order from left to right.

Example: Press 012 for “12”.

13-99 Press 2 digits in order.

Example: Press 22 for “22”.

100-125 Press the 3 digits in order.

Example: Press 110 for “110”.

VHF/UHF/CATV CHANNELS

VHF

2-13

UHF

14-69

CATV

VHF

2-13

STD/HRC/IRC

14-36 (A) (W)

37-59 (AA) (WW)

60-85 (AAA) (ZZZ)

86-94 (86) (94)

95-99 (A-5) (A-1)

100-125 (100)(125)

01 (5A)

5 Press REC/OTR.

“ ” will appear on the screen

for about 4 seconds and “REC” will

appear on the display window.

REC/OTR

CH 110

INDEX

VCR DVD

CLOCK/COUNTER

INDEX +/–

STOP

Clock/counter display

Press CLOCK/COUNTER. The clock and tape counter alternate with each other in the display window.

COUNTER

CLOCK/COUNTER

Video index search system

This function enables you to locate the beginning of any recording made on the VCR.

Recording an INDEX mark

The Index Search function automatically records an INDEX mark on the tape whenever a recording is initiated.

INDEX

CH 001

Press VCR DVD selector. The DVD mode and the

VCR mode alternate with each other in the display.

VCR

DVD

CLOCK

DVD mode

Index search

Press INDEX + or – during stop or play mode.

For Succeeding programs: Press INDEX +.

For Preceding programs: Press INDEX –.

(As many as 9 index points can be accessed via this method.)

When the INDEX + or – is pressed, the unit starts searching the INDEX

NO. selected and finds the portion, then playback starts automatically.

To stop the Index Search, press

STOP.

–

INDEX

SKIP

INDEX

SKIP

+ or is displayed

INDEX NO. (up to 9)

VCR mode

Notes:

• If you rewind the tape beyond “00:00:00”, a minus sign (“–”) will be displayed in front of the time.

• When you load a tape, the counter will reset to “00:00:00”.

• The counter does not function on nonrecorded (blank) sections of the tape. When you rewind, fast forward or play tapes through blank sections, the counter stops.

Notes:

• When you record an INDEX mark at the very beginning of the tape, the mark may not be found.

• During INDEX search, the tape may stop and begin to play at a slightly different location.

• INDEX may not function properly with old or worn out video tapes.

• INDEX marks may not be found if it is extremely close to the point where the search began.

• In recording, if you stop recording temporarily, the INDEX mark is not recorded on the tape.

SQPB (S-VHS Quasi Playback)

You can playback video cassette tapes recorded in the

S-VHS system.

However, the picture will not have the high resolution of

S-VHS system.

Note: You cannot record S-VHS video format with this VCR.

TV/VCR

PAUSE/STILL

STOP

To stop recording

Press STOP to stop recording.

“ ” will appear on screen for about

4 seconds.

Auto Rewind feature

This VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended (except during OTR and timer recording). It will also eject the tape.

To stop recording temporarily

Press PAUSE/STILL to avoid recording unwanted material. Press again to continue the recording.

“ ” will appear on screen for

about 4 seconds.

Notes:

• The pause function will be released after 5 minutes to prevent damage to the tape or the VCR. The VCR will change to the

STOP mode.

• You can select a recording channel in the recording pause mode.

Recording one program while watching another

While the VCR is recording, select your desired channel on the TV.

When a TV is connected with an antenna cable only, press TV/VCR to select the TV position.

The “VCR” display will go off and recording will continue.

Select the TV channel you want to watch by using the

TV channel selector.

Note:

Some CATV hookups do not permit viewing one channel while recording another. See pages 16 and 17 .

Recording (VCR)

One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)

The One-touch Timer Recording feature provides a simple and convenient way to make a timed recording.

VCR DVD

STOP

One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding video input.

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

Example: One-touch Timer Recording for 30 minutes.

1 Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.

The VCR will automatically turn on.

2 Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed

SP or SLP.

The tape counter and “SP” or “SLP” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.

SP/SLP

PLAY MODE

4 Press Number button or CH +/– to select the channel to be recorded.

CH 110

9 0

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

5 Press REC/OTR. Recording begins. Press the button again to stop recording after 30 minutes.

Each additional press of REC/OTR will increase recording time as shown in the chart below, up to a maximum of 6 hours.

The OTR and recording time will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds. And, “ ” will appear on the display.

Press once twice

3 times

4 times

5 times

Recording time Press

NORMAL REC

0:30

1:00

1:30

2:00

6 times

7 times

8 times

Recording time

3:00

4:00

5:00

6:00 9 times

10 times NORMAL REC

OTR 0 : 30

CH 110 REC/OTR

00 : 00 : 00 SP

INDEX

3 Set “TV” or “CATV” option to the appropriate position 27 .

TV - VHF/UHF channels

CATV - CABLE TV channels

To cancel OTR

Press STOP or turn off the power.

“ ” will appear on screen for about 4 seconds.

Note:

If you wish to watch the DVD playback during OTR or standard recording, press VCR DVD selector to change to DVD mode and perform the DVD playback 43 .

Recording (VCR)

Timer recording (continued)

VCR DVD

SET +/–

TIMER REC

VCR MENU

ENTER

CANCEL

To confirm or cancel a program

Weekly (e.g. WKL-TU: each Tuesday) or daily (e.g. MO-

SA: Monday to Saturday) Timer recording

Follow the procedure of timer recording on the previous page. At step 3 press SET + or – repeatedly until the desired setting appears. Then press ENTER.

When you press SET – repeatedly, the

DATE indicator will change as follows, in this case the day is Friday.

The current day (Friday) SU-SA (Sunday to Saturday)

1 If the Timer has been activated, press TIMER

REC to deactivate the Timer.

The timer symbol ( ) will disappear. Then press VCR DVD selector to change to VCR mode.

VCR

DVD TIMER REC

One month later minus one day

WKL-WE

(Weekly Wednesday)

SET +

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

MO-SA (Monday to Saturday)

MO-FR (Monday to Friday)

WKL-TH (Weekly Thursday)

DATE

WKL-WE

START END CH

CH –

To confirm Timer program:

At step 1 on the previous page select “TIMER REC

SET” and press ENTER.

The timer program list will appear on the screen.

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

DATE

26(SU)

START END CH

11:00PM 11:30PM125SLP

+/–/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU

If the programs overlap another 3 To cancel Timer program:

Press SET + or – to select the unwanted program, then press CANCEL to cancel the program.

Do not overlap timer programs as portions of the conflicting programs will be lost. The first recording time has priority over the next recording time as shown in the diagram below.

Program 1

8 : 00 9 : 00 10 : 00 11 : 00

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

CANCEL

DATE START END

Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð

Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð

Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð

Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð

á+/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENUñ

Program 2

Program 3

Recording

Control Settings

Prog.1

Deleted Parts

Non Recorded Portion Parts

Prog.2

Prog.3

4 Press VCR MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Notes:

• The daily/weekly recording can be made continuously until the recording is canceled or the tape reaches the end.

• During timer recording the automatic rewinding mechanism does not function.

Notes:

• If there are other timer record programs remaining, TIMER

REC must be pressed to reactivate the timer, otherwise the remaining timer record programs will be ignored.

• You cannot confirm the Timer program during timer recording operation.

• You can correct or cancel a programmed setting in program confirm mode.

Timer recording

Timer recording can be programmed on-screen with the remote control.

The built-in timer allows automatic unattended recording of up to 8 programs within 1 month.

VCR DVD

EJECT

2,3

TIMER REC

1,5

1–3

CANCEL

Timer recording

Preparation:

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.

• Check the time and date are correct

Example: Program a timer recording for the 26th day, channel 125 (CATV), 11:00 - 11:30 PM on timer program number 1 (Tape speed: SLP).

1 Press VCR MENU. Select “TIMER REC SET”, then press ENTER.

VCR MENU

SETUP

CH –

SET +

ENTER

CH +

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

SET –

5 To enter other programs, repeat step 2 through 4.

VCR MENU

SETUP

• To return to the normal screen, press VCR MENU twice.

DATE START END

26(SU) 11:00PM 11:30PM125 SLP

Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð

Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð

Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð

Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð

á+/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU ñ

2 Press SET + or – to select one of the program line, then press ENTER.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

DATE START END

Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð

Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð

Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð

Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð

á+/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENUñ

6 Press TIMER REC. The timer symbol ( ) will appear on the display and the VCR stands by for recording.

TIMER REC At the same time, VCR mode will change to DVD mode automatically.

You can use DVD even if the VCR is in the timer recording mode.

If you do not use the DVD, turn the power off.

Notes:

• The timer recording will start at 5 seconds before the time you predetermined.

• If the timer symbol( ) does not appear on the display in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC, the cassette may not have been loaded.

• If the cassette is ejected in spite of the pressing of TIMER

REC, the erase prevention tab of the cassette may have been removed.

3 Press SET + or – to select the date, then press

ENTER.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

DATE

26(SU)

Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð

Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð

á+/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENUñ

4 Set the start time, end time, channel and tape speed as in step 3.

DATE START END CH

26(SU) 11:00PM 11:30PM125 SLP

Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð

Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð

á+/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU ñ

Notes:

• Press CANCEL to move cursor backward for correction.

• To record from external source set the channel to “L1” or

“L2”.

Notes:

• If the timer symbol ( ) blinks when the timer recording ended, the TV program has not been completely recorded because of an insufficient tape length. Press TIMER REC to cancel the timer program or press EJECT to remove the cassette tape.

• During timer recording standby mode, the VCR mode cannot be operated. To use the VCR, press TIMER REC at first, then press

VCR DVD selector to change to VCR mode. After you use the

VCR, press TIMER REC again to put the VCR into timer recording standby mode.

• If you press TIMER REC during timer recording, the recording operation will be interrupted. If you press TIMER REC again within the programmed time, the recording operation will start again.

• After a power failure or disconnection of the power plug, all programmed recording settings and time display will be lost upon resumption of power. In this case, reset the clock 24 and reprogram any timer recording.

Other functions (VCR)

Stereo recording and playback /

Second Audio Program (SAP)

AUDIO SELECT

SET +/–

Stereo recording and playback

The VHS Hi-Fi audio system permits high fidelity recording of MTS STEREO TV broadcasts.

When a MTS STEREO broadcast is received, “STEREO” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds and the program can be viewed or recorded in stereo.

The Hi-Fi stereo recording procedure is the same as for normal recordings.

STEREO

Note:

When using a CATV system, stereo TV programs may be transmitted over a mono cable channel. In this case

“STEREO” will not appear and the sound will be in mono.

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO

VCR MENU

ENTER

CANCEL

Second Audio Program (SAP)

Your DVD/VCR is fitted with a SAP broadcast system which enables you to switch to a second audio program when viewing a selected channel.

This function applies only when the program is broadcast in multi-languages through the SAP broadcast system.

1 Press VCR MENU. Then press SET + or – to select “SAP”.

VCR MENU

SETUP

CH –

SET +

ENTER

CH +

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

SET –

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

Output selection

When viewing an MTS stereo TV program, or playing a prerecorded VHS Hi-Fi stereo videotape, press AUDIO

SELECT to select how the audio will be heard through the speakers. Normally set to the Hi-Fi stereo position, this button can be set to the MONO position if the stereo broadcast or videotape audio is of poor quality. The “R” and “L” positions allow the audio from the Right or Left Hi-

Fi channel to be heard over both TV speakers. This button has no effect when viewing a MONO videotape or

TV program. Each time when you press the button,

OUTPUT SELECTION display appears on the screen for several seconds. Refer to the chart below.

OUTPUT

SELECTION

SOUND HEARD ON BOTH

SPEAKERS

STEREO

L CH

R CH

MONO

STEREO

LEFT CHANNEL AUDIO

RIGHT CHANNEL AUDIO

MONO

2 Press ENTER to select “ON”.

Then press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

VCR MENU

SETUP

TIMER REC SET

AUTO REPEAT ON OFF

SAP

CH SETUP

SYSTEM SETUP

ON OFF

á+/-/ENTER/MENU ñ

Listening to SAP

When the VCR is turned on or a channel selection is made, make certain the letters “SAP” appears on the screen for about 4 seconds. This means that the “Second

Audio Program” broadcasting is available.

STEREO SAP SAP

Notes:

• When playing back a tape that is not recorded in Hi-Fi stereo mode, the audio will automatically be monaural.

• When listening to a VHS Hi-Fi video tape or MTS broadcast through the VHF/UHF jack (Audio/Video cable not connected), the sound will be monaural.

Other functions (VCR)

Duplicating a video tape

If you connect the DVD/VCR to another VCR or Camcorder, you can duplicate

a previously recorded tape. Make all connections before turning on the power.

VCR DVD

Duplicating a video tape

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.

• Load a previously recorded tape into the playback

VCR or Camcorder.

1 Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed

SP or SLP.

SP/SLP

PLAY MODE

It is recommended that you set the

tape speed to the SP mode on the

recording VCR for best results.

2 Press INPUT SELECT once or twice to select

AUDIO/VIDEO input position.

“L1” or “L2” will appear in the display.

INPUT SELECT

PROGESSIVE

Connection with second VCR

Playback VCR

To VIDEO OUT To AUDIO (R) OUT

To AUDIO (L) OUT

AUDIO/VIDEO cable (supplied)

Recording VCR

To VIDEO IN To AUDIO (R) IN

To AUDIO (L) IN

L1: on the rear panel

L2: on the front panel

3 Press PLAY on the playback VCR or Camcorder.

Connection with Camcorder

Playback Camcorder

To AV Jack

4 Press REC/OTR on the recording VCR.

The duplicating process begins.

REC/OTR

Recording VCR

5 Press STOP after duplicating a video tape.

To VIDEO IN

To AUDIO (R) IN

To AUDIO (L) IN

AUDIO/VIDEO cable (not supplied)

For duplicating a previously recorded tape from a camcorder, follow the camcorder manufacturer’s instructions. A typical camcorder dubbing hookup is shown above.

Basic playback (DVD)

Playing a disc

This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.

CAUTION

Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing.

Neglecting to do so may cause serious personal injury.

4 3, 5

Display window

STOP PLAY 1

DVD

VCD

Basic playback

Preparations:

• When you want to view a disc, turn on the TV and select the corresponding video input connected to the DVD/VCR. This may include S-video or component video inputs which are exclusive to DVD playback.

• When you want to enjoy the sound of discs from the audio system, turn on the audio system and select the input connected to the DVD/VCR.

Press ON/STANDBY (I / ).

The DVD/VCR turns on.

Press VCR/DVD SELECT to select the DVD mode.

The DVD indicator will light.

Press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY on the unit.

The disc tray closes automatically.

On the TV-screen, “ ” changes to

“Reading” and then playback commences.

• A menu screen will appear on the TV screen, if the disc has a menu feature.

Reading

3 Press OPEN/CLOSE.

The disc tray opens.

6 Press / or / to select title.

SET +

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

4 Place the disc on the disc tray.

With the playback side down

7 Press ENTER.

SET + • Title is selected and play commences.

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

• There are two different disc sizes. Place the disc in the correct guide on the disc tray. If the disc is out of the guide, it may damage the disc and cause the DVD/VCR to malfunction.

• Do not place a disc which is unplayable in this

DVD/VCR.

8 Press STOP to end playback.

• The unit records the stopped point, depending on the disc. “ ” appears on the screen. Press

PLAY to resume playback (from the scene point).

• If you press STOP again or unload the disc (“ ” appears on the screen.), the unit will clear the stopped point.

To start playback in the stop mode

Press PLAY.

Recording a DVD/CD disc

You can record disc material in DVD, Audio CD, etc. onto a Video tape with this DVD/VCR.

Duplicating a DVD or CD disc

Preparation:

• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.

(The VCR indicator will light.)

• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.

• Load a DVD/CD disc.

1 Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed

SP or SLP.

SP/SLP

PLAY MODE

Notes:

• You may not be able to record the beginning of the disc.

Begin VCR recording once program playback commences on the DVD.

• When the scanning mode is set to the progressive mode, you cannot duplicate a disc material onto a video tape.

When REC/OTR is pressed, the PROGRESSIVE indicator

“ ” on the display window will flash and “Please Set

Off” will appear on the screen.

• You can not record discs encoded with copy guard function. The following icon and text will show up on the

TV screen.

00 : 00 : 00 SP DISC IS COPY PROTECTED

2 Press VCR DVD selector to select the DVD mode.

The DVD indicator will light.

VCR

DVD

3 Press PLAY to start playback.

PLAY

4 Press REC/OTR to start recording.

REC/OTR

The DVD/VCR will change to the

VCR mode automatically and the playback picture or sound will be duplicated on the video cassette tape.

5 Press STOP if you finish recording.

If you wish to stop a DVD/CD disc, press VCR DVD selector to change the DVD mode, then press STOP.

VCR DVD

OPEN/CLOSE

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

STOP

ENTER

To obtain a higher quality picture

Occasionally, some picture noise not usually visible during a normal broadcast may appear on the TV screen while playing a DVD video disc because the high resolution pictures on these discs include a lot of information. While the amount of noise depends on the TV you use with this DVD/VCR, you should generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD video discs.

About

The icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the function described under that heading.

: You can use this function with DVD video discs.

: You can use this function with Video CDs.

: You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.

To pause playback (still mode)

Press PAUSE/STILL during playback.

To stop playback

Press STOP.

To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button.

• The sound is muted during still mode.

To remove the disc

Press OPEN/CLOSE.

Remove the disc after the disc tray opens completely.

Playing a Disc while the VCR section is recording or standing by for timer recording

1) Start to record.

Follow steps 1~5 on page 34.

• If the DVD/VCR is standing by for recording, turn on the DVD/VCR.

2) Press VCR DVD selector to select DVD mode. The

DVD indicator will light.

3) Play a disc.

Follow steps 3 ~ 5 on page 42.

• Press PLAY if the DVD/VCR does not start to play a disc automatically.

4) Stop to play.

Press STOP to stop play back a disc.

Screen saver function

The screen saver operates when you leave the unit in

DVD stop mode for about five minutes.

The screen will repeatedly get dark gradually and back to normal.

To turn off the PBC

Press number button 1 in the stop mode, then press

ENTER.

Be sure to press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close the disc tray after you remove the disc.

Notes:

• If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again (See pages 8 and 61).

• Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.

• When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (ie. the wrong way up) and press the OPEN/CLOSE button or the PLAY button on the unit, “Reading” will appear on the display for 30 seconds and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.

• Some discs may not work the resuming facility.

• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC, see above.

• Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs.

• Do not move the DVD/VCR during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.

• Use the OPEN/CLOSE button to open and close the disc tray. Do not push the disc tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the DVD/VCR to malfunction.

• Do not push up on the disc tray or put any objects other than discs on the disc tray. Doing so may cause the DVD/VCR to malfunction.

• In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press the

ON/STANDBY (I / ) button on your remote control once the movie is completed.

• There may be a slight delay between you pressing the button and the function activating.

Basic playback (DVD)

Playing a disc (continued)

You can play discs at various speeds.

REW

SKIP /

PLAY

FWD

PAUSE/STILL

SLOW

DVD

VCD

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions

Press REW or FWD during playback.

REW FWD

REW: Fast reverse playback

FWD: Fast forward playback

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

PLAY

Each time you press the REW or

FWD button, the playback speed changes.

Notes:

• The DVD/VCR mutes sound and subtitles during reverse and forward scan of DVD video discs. However, the DVD/

VCR plays sound during fast forward or fast reverse play of audio CDs.

• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.

DVD

VCD

Playing frame by frame

Press PAUSE/STILL during still playback.

Each time you press the PAUSE/

STILL button, the picture advances one frame.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

PLAY

Note:

The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

DVD

VCD

Playing in slow-motion

Press SLOW during playback.

SLOW Each time you press the SLOW button, the slow-motion speed changes.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

PLAY

Note:

The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.

DVD

VCD

Locating a chapter or track

Press SKIP or repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want.

Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.

INDEX

SKIP

+ To locate succeeding chapters or tracks.

–

INDEX

SKIP

Playback starts from the beginning of the current chapter or track.

When you press twice in quick successions, playback starts from the beginning of the preceding chapter or track.

Notes:

• A “Prohibition” symbol may appear at the upper left of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not available on the disc, or the DVD/VCR can not access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the DVD/

VCR.

• The unit is capable of holding a still video image or On screen display image on your television screen indefinitely. If you leave the still video image or On screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time, you risk permanent damage to your television screen. Projection televisions are very susceptible.

Advanced playback (DVD)

MP3/WMA/JPEG playback (continued)

You can select your desired JPEG file on the file menu and picture menu.

The selected JPEG file is automatically adjusted to the TV screen. (When the aspect ratio of the JPEG file is different to your TV screen, the black bar will appear at the top and bottom, or the both sides of the TV screen.

OPEN/CLOSE

0–9

SKIP /

PLAY

STOP

TOP MENU

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

JPEG CD playback

1 Press OPEN/CLOSE.

The disc tray will open.

Place a disc on which

JPEG files have been recorded onto the tray.

5 Press ENTER.

The selected picture appears on the TV screen.

SET +

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

2 Press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY.

The disc tray closes automatically.

On the TV-screen, “Reading” will appear.

Reading will take as much time as the number of file.

Reading

PLAY

6 Press STOP to end playback.

The file menu appears on the TV screen.

If you want to watch the other file, repeat steps 4~5.

3 A file menu screen will appear on the TV screen.

Press or to select folder.

CD-R

Collection

Pic-1

Pic-2

Pic-3

-/36

Pic-8

Pic-9

Pic-10

Pic-4

Pic-5

Pic-6

Pic-7

Pic-11

Pic-12

Pic-13

Pic-14

/0-9/Enter/Play Mode/Menu

4 Press / or the desired file.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

or Number keys to select

CD-R

Collection

Pic-1

Pic-2

Pic-3

Pic-4

-/36

Pic-8

Pic-9

Pic-10

Pic-11

Pic-5

Pic-6

Pic-7

Pic-12

Pic-13

Pic-14

/0-9/Enter/Play Mode/Menu

To display a picture menu, press MENU.

(To return to a file menu, press TOP MENU.)

Press / or / to select the desired file.

MENU

Notes:

• The picture menu is displayed when the FUJICOLOR CD or the Kodak Picture CD are played. To display the file menu press TOP MENU.

• During MP3/WMA/JPEG-Playback, you can not use SEARCH,

A-B Repeat functions.

• You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and

Program playback for MP3/WMA/JPEG CD Playback. (See pages 52 and 53.)

• In the case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, WMA and

JPEG files, the files are played back by selecting them from the file menu.

File menu information

Operation

Media type

Elapsed time

File number

Folder

TOP MENU

: Indicates MP3 file

: Indicates WMA file

: Indicates JPEG file

/Menu

• To display next list, press SKIP or .

• When PLAY has been pressed after displaying the file menu, or when the disc tray has been closed after pressing PLAY in step 2, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first file is an MP3/WMA file, only MP3/WMA files are played back in order.

Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in both the United States and other countries.

Advanced playback (DVD)

MP3/WMA/JPEG playback

This player can play back the MP3/WMA/JPEG-data which has been recorded on CD-R or CD-RW. To produce the MP3/WMA/JPEG-data, you need a

Windows-PC with CD-ROM drive and a MP3/WMA/JPEG-encoding Software

(not supplied).

The Apple-HFS-System can not be played.

OPEN/CLOSE

0–9

PLAY

STOP

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

MP3/WMA playback

1 Press OPEN/CLOSE.

The disc tray will open.

Place a disc on which MP3 or WMA files have been recorded onto the tray.

5 Press STOP to end playback.

PLAY

• The unit records the stopped point.

“ ” appears on the screen. Press

PLAY to resume playback (from the scene point).

• If you press STOP again or unload the disc, the unit will clear the stopped point.

2 Press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY.

CH –

PLAY

A file menu screen will appear on the TV screen.

Press

SET +

ENTER

SET –

4 Press / or / or Number keys to select the desired file, then press ENTER.

The file is selected and play commences.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

The disc tray closes automatically.

On the TV-screen,“Reading” will appear.

Reading will take as much time as the number of file.

Reading or to select folder.

CD-R

Pops

Japan

Bay Bridge

CLOSE MY EYES

DIVE TO BLUE

Honey

BLUE EYES

Blurry Eyes

-/72 --:-flower

Lies and Truthwinter fall

Rain

Strawberry

Welcome party

Thailand

/0-9/Enter/Play Mode

CH +

• In case the folder includes more than

15 tracks, press or to display next file list.

-/72 --:--

CD-R

Pops

Japan

Bay Bridge

CLOSE MY EYES

DIVE TO BLUE

Honey

-/72 flower

Lies and Truthwinter fall

Rain

Strawberry

--:--

BLUE EYES

Blurry Eyes

Welcome party

Thailand

/0-9/Enter/Play Mode

CD-R

Pops

Mother

Hold Your Last

/0-9/Enter/Play Mode

• When PLAY has been pressed after displaying the file menu, or when the disc tray has been closed after pressing

PLAY in step 2, playback begins automatically starting from the first file.

In this case, if the first file is an MP3/

WMA file, only MP3/WMA files are played back in order.

If the first file is a JPEG file, the first

JPEG file is played back.

MP3/WMA/JPEG CD Information

Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG CD playback

• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD is the disc that is standardized by

ISO9660, its file name must include 3-digits extension letters, “mp3”, ”wma”, “jpg”.

• The directory and file names of the MP3/WMA/JPEG CD must be correspond to the ISO standardized files.

• This unit can read 200 files per disc. If a disc has more than

200 files, it reads up to 200 files, the remaining files will be omitted.

• The unit is able to recognize up to a maximum of 50 directories per disc.

• MP3/WMA CDs cannot be used for playback for the purpose of recording.

• If the CD has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG files, only audio tracks are played.

• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/

WMA/JPEG files depending on its structure.

• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specification” can be played back, the file name is displayed (within 16 letters) on the screen. Long file names will be condensed.

• The music files recorded by “Hierarchical File System”

(HFS) cannot be played.

• The unit can play back baseline and progressive JPEG files.

Limitations on display

• The maximum number for display is 16 letters. Available letters for display are the following: capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _

(under score).

• Other letters than those above are replaced in hyphen.

Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG files

To play back MP3/WMA/JPEG CD in the recorded order,

1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG software that records data alphabetically or numerically.

2. Name each file including two-digit or three-digit number

(e.g. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).

3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders.

WMA disc compatibility with this player is limited as follows:

1) Sampling Frequency: within 32 -- 48 kHz

2) Bit Rate: within 48 -- 192kbps.

Mono WMA files and WMA files (under 48kbps) cannot be played back on this player.

CAUTION:

• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs can not be played back depending on the recording conditions.

• The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non-MP3/WMA/

JPEG files can not be played back.

SETUP

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

Setting the JPEG Interval

You can continuously play back all JPEG files automatically.

After the setting below, start playing the disc on which JPEG files have been recorded.

Press SETUP in the stop mode. Press select “Picture”, then press ENTER.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Language Picture Sound

or to

Parental Other

To make SETUP screen disappear, press SETUP.

VCR MENU

SETUP

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

/Enter/Setup/Return

Press

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

to select “JPEG Interval”.

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Display

Off

JPEG Interval

Select Files

Off

All

/Enter/Setup/Return

Press ENTER or

SET +

/ to select your desired time.

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Display

JPEG Interval

Off

5 Seconds

Select Files All

/Enter/Setup/Return

Off:

Plays back one file at a time.

5 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 5 second intervals.

10 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 10 second intervals.

15 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show in 15 second intervals.

Advanced playback (DVD)

MP3/WMA/JPEG playback (continued)

SETUP

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

Setting the Select Files

When playing back a CD containing a mixture of MP3, WMA and JPEG files, only MP3/WMA or JPEG files can be displayed on the file menu.

1 Press SETUP in the stop mode.

Press or to select “Picture”, then press

ENTER.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

4 To make SETUP screen disappear, press

SETUP.

VCR MENU

SETUP

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

/Enter/Setup/Return

Press or to select “Select Files”.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Display

JPEG Interval

Off

4:3

Off

Select Files All

/Enter/Setup/Return

Press ENTER or / to select your desired file type.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

All:

Displays all files.

Music Only:

Displays only MP3/WMA files.

Pictures Only:

Displays only JPEG files.

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Off

4:3

Display

JPEG Interval

Off

Select Files Pictures Only

/Enter/Setup/Return

Advanced playback (DVD)

Zooming/Locating desired scene

DISPLAY

0–9

▲ / ▼ / /

JUMP

ZOOM

ENTER

CANCEL

DVD

VCD

Zooming

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.

Press ZOOM during playback.

CM SKIP

ZOOM

The centre part of the image will be zoomed in.

Each press of ZOOM will change the

ZOOM 1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5) and 3

(x 2.0).

2 Press / / / to view a different part of the frame.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

You may move the frame from the centre position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or

RIGHT direction.

3 In the zoom mode press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a 1:1 view ( Off).

CM SKIP

ZOOM

Notes:

• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the zoom mode.

• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.

DVD

VCD

Locating desired scene

Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the disc to locate the desired point to play back.

To check the title, chapter and time, press DISPLAY.

Press JUMP during playback or stop mode.

ZERO RETURN

JUMP

Jump Time

Title

Chapter

/Enter/0 9/Cancel/Jump

3 Press Numbered buttons (0–9) to change the number.

9 0

• If you input a wrong number, press

CANCEL.

• Refer to the package supplied with the disc to check the numbers.

CH –

Press or to select the “Time”, “Title” or

“Chapter”.

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Press ENTER. Playback starts.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

• When you change the title, playback starts from Chapter 1 of the selected title.

• Some discs may not work in the above operation.

Note:

In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does not work. To turn off PBC, see page 43 .

ANGLE

ZOOM

▲ / ▼ / /

Zooming (JPEG CD)

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the JPEG image.

1 Press ZOOM during playback.

CM SKIP

ZOOM

Enlarged JPEG images are displayed.

You can make the images even larger by repeatedly pressing ZOOM.

2 Press / / / to view a different part of the frame.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

You may move the frame from the centre position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or

RIGHT direction.

1 2

3 In the zoom mode press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a 1:1 view ( Off).

CM SKIP

ZOOM

Off 3

Changing angles (JPEG CD)

You can display JPEG images rotating at 90 degree intervals.

1 Press ANGLE during playback.

Images are rotated 90 degrees to the right.

COUNTER RESET

ANGLE

2 Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is selected.

Pressing ANGLE four times returns the image to its original angle.

COUNTER RESET

ANGLE • Images are displayed at the same angle until the disc is removed.

Marking desired scenes

The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points.

You can resume playback from each scene.

▲ / ▼

MARKER

ENTER

CANCEL

DVD

VCD

Returning to the scenes DVD

VCD

Marking the scenes

1 Press MARKER during playback.

MARKER

Marker

Marker 3

/Enter/Cancel/Marker

1 Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.

MARKER

Marker

Marker 3 02

/Enter/CancelMarker

2 Select the blank Marker using or .

Then press ENTER at the desired scene.

• Repeat this procedure to set the other 2 scenes.

SET + Marker

Marker

Marker 3

/Enter/Cancel/Marker

27 54

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

3 Press MARKER to remove this display.

MARKER

CH –

Press or to select the Marker 1-3.

SET +

Marker

Marker 3 02

/Enter/Cancel/Marker

CH +

ENTER

SET –

Press ENTER.

SET +

Playback starts from the marked scene.

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

To cancel the Marker

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press CANCEL.

Notes:

•

Some discs may not work with the marking operation.

The marking is canceled when you open the disc tray or turn the power off.

Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to appear.

Advanced playback (DVD)

Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback

PLAY MODE

A-B RPT

DVD

VCD

Repeat playback of Title, Chapter and Track

ENTER

▼ / /

DVD

VCD

A-B Repeat playback

A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat material between two selected points.

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.

SP/SLP

PLAY MODE

1 Press A-B RPT during playback.

A-B RPT The start point is selected.

2 DVD

Press / or ENTER once or twice to select

“Chapter” or “Title”.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Repeat :

/Enter/Play Mode

Off Repeat :

/Enter/Play Mode

Chapter Repeat :

/Enter/Play Mode

Title

CH –

CD/VCD

Press to select “Repeat”.

Press / or ENTER once or twice to select

“Track” or “All”.

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Play Mode

Repeat

Off

/Enter/Play Mode

Play Mode

Repeat

Off

Track

/Enter/Play Mode

Play Mode : Off

Repeat : All

/Enter/Play Mode

2 Press A-B RPT again.

A-B RPT The end point is selected. Playback starts at the point that you selected.

Playback stops at the end point, returns to Point A automatically, then starts again.

A B

3 Press PLAY MODE again to make the screen disappear.

Press PLAY to start Repeat playback.

To resume normal playback, select Repeat “Off”.

Notes:

Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.

To resume normal playback

Press A-B RPT again.

A-B RPT “ Off ” appears on the screen.

Notes:

• In A-B repeat mode, subtitles near point A or B may not appear.

• A-B Repeat playback is not available in multi-angle scenes.

• A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback is on.

• You may not be able to set A-B Repeat, depending on the scenes of the DVD.

• A-B repeat does not work with an interactive DVD, MP3/

WMA/JPEG CD and Video CD with PBC.

Advanced playback (DVD)

Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu

ANGLE

PLAY

TOP MENU

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

Changing angles

When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.

1 Press ANGLE during playback.

The current angle will appear.

COUNTER RESET

ANGLE

1/9

2 Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is selected.

COUNTER RESET

ANGLE

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Title selection

Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.

1 Press TOP MENU during playback.

TOP MENU Title menu appears on the screen.

3 Press ENTER or PLAY.

SET +

The playback of the selected title will start.

CH – CH +

PLAY

ENTER

SET –

2 Press / or / to select the desired title.

SET +

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title.

Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a

“menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.

DVD menu

Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.

When you play back these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language and sound-track language, etc. using the menu.

1 Press MENU during playback.

MENU

The DVD menu appears on the screen.

• Press MENU again to resume playback at the scene when you pressed MENU.

CH –

Press ENTER.

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely.

2 Press / or / to select the desired item.

SET +

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume playback from the scene point when you pressed MENU.

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Program playback/Random playback (CD)

You can arrange the order of tracks on the disc.

0–9

PLAY MODE

PLAY

▲ / ▼ / /

ENTER

CANCEL

VCD

Program playback

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

SP/SLP

PLAY MODE Play Mode

Repeat

Off

/Enter/Play Mode

2 Press or to select Play Mode, then press

/ or to select “Program”.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Play Mode

Repeat

1 4

Clear

: Program

: Off

7 10

Program Playback

/Enter/0 9/Cancel/Play Mode

CH –

Press / or / to select “Program

Playback” and press ENTER.

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

The programmes you selected will start to playback in the order.

To return to normal playback, select

Play Mode: “Off”.

Play Mode

Repeat

1 7

2 3

3 1 1

Clear

: Program

: Off

Program Playback

/Enter/0 9/Cancel/Play Mode

3 Press / or / to select the programming position. Use Numbered buttons (0–9) to input the Track numbers.

CH –

SET +

CH +

• To program others, repeat Step 3.

• If you input a wrong number, press

CANCEL.

ENTER

SET –

9 0

Play Mode

Repeat

1 9

2 3

3 1 1

Clear

: Program

: Off

Program Playback

/Enter/0 9/Cancel/Play Mode

To cancel program playback

Select “Clear” and press ENTER.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

• The program is canceled when you open the disc tray or turn the power off.

Note:

In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you can not set

Program playback.

VCD

Random playback

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

SP/SLP

PLAY MODE

3 Press PLAY.

PLAY

The Random Playback will start.

2 Press / to select Play Mode, then press

/ to select “Random”.

SET +

Play Mode

Repeat

: Random

: Off

/Enter/Play Mode

CH –

ENTER

CH +

SET –

Note:

In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you can not set

Random playback.

Function setup (DVD)

Changing soundtrack language/

Setting surround sound

AUDIO

DVD

VCD

Changing soundtrack language

You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.

In case of Video CD playback

Press AUDIO during playback.

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO

The current soundtrack language will appear.

Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO.

Spatializer Off

2/8 Fra Dolby Digital

Spatializer Off

2 Press AUDIO repeatedly until the desired language is selected.

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO

The on-screen display will disappear after a few seconds.

Notes:

• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the button several times, the language is not recorded on the disc.

• Changing soundtrack language is cancelled when you open the disc tray. The initial default language or available language will be heard if the disc is played back again.

DVD

VCD

Setting surround sound

This DVD/VCR equipped with a “SPATIALIZER VIRTUAL SURROUND”. It can produce the effect of being in a cinema or a concert hall.

During disc playback press AUDIO. 1

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO

1/8 Eng Dolby Digital

Spatializer Off

To cancel Surround mode:

Follow the left steps 1~2, then press or to select the

“Off” position.

Note:

The “SPATIALIZER VIRTUAL SURROUND” is effective only for the sound of disc.

Press or to select “On”.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

1/8 Eng Dolby Digital

Spatializer On

Spatializer ® 3-Dimensional Sound Processing provided by

Desper Products. Inc.

Certain audio features of this product manufactured under a license from Desper Products, Inc., Spatializer ® and the circle-in-square device are trademarks owned by Desper

Products, Inc.

Function setup (DVD)

Setting subtitles/Karaoke playback

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

▲ / ▼ / /

Turning the subtitles on and off

When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can turn the subtitles on or off.

Press SUBTITLE during playback until “Off” appears.

ATR

SUBTITLE Off

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to turn the subtitles on even if they are recorded on it.

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to turn the subtitles off.

Changing the subtitle language

You can select the language when playing back a disc recorded with multi-lingual subtitles.

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback until your desired language appears.

ATR

SUBTITLE

1/32 Eng

The on-screen display will disappear after a few seconds.

Notes:

• Changing subtitle language is cancelled when you open the disc tray.

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the subtitles even if multilingual subtitles are recorded on it. While playing the DVD, the subtitle may change when: -you open or close the disc tray -you change the title.

• In some cases, the subtitle language is not changed to the selected one immediately.

Karaoke playback

You can turn the vocal on or off recorded on the DVD KARAOKE.

1 During DVD KARAOKE disc playback, press

AUDIO.

AUDIO SELECT

AUDIO 1/8 Eng Dolby Digital

Spatializer Off

CH –

Press ▲ or ▼ until the KARAOKE symbol ( ) appears.

• If you play non-Karaoke disc, the KARAOKE symbol ( ) does not appear.

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

1/8 Eng Dolby Digital

Off

Notes:

• The vocal output feature is used during playback of

Dolby Digital (multi-channel) recorded DVD KARAOKE discs. This feature allows you to turn off vocal audio tracks, or restore them for background accompaniment.

• When playing Karaoke, connect appropriate audio equipment such as an amplifier to the DVD/VCR.

3 Press or to select “On” or “Off”.

SET +

On : The primary vocal is output when it is recorded on the disc.

Off : The primary vocal is not output.

CH –

ENTER

CH +

SET –

Function setup (DVD)

Setting the aspect ratio of TV screen

You can select the aspect ratio for your TV.

The following pages describe the setup/operation in DVD mode.

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

Setting the aspect ratio of TV screen

1 Press SETUP in the stop mode or No Disc.

Press or to select “Picture”.

CH –

VCR MENU

SETUP

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

/Enter/Setup/Return

You have the following screen sizes to choose from:

4:3 Letter box:

Select this mode when connecting to a conventional TV.

When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands at the top and bottom of screen.

4:3 Pan scan:

It displays the wide picture on the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off.

16:9 Wide:

Select this mode when connecting to a wide-screen TV.

A wide screen picture is displayed full size.

2 Press or ENTER, then press or to select

“Tv Screen”.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Display

Off

4:3

JPEG Interval

Select Files

Off

All

/Enter/Setup/Return

4 To make SETUP screen disappear, press SETUP or RETURN while the SETUP screen is being displayed.

VCR MENU

SETUP

RETURN 3 Press or ENTER.

Press or to select your desired screen type, then press ENTER.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Off

4:3 4:3

Display

JPEG Interval

Off

Select Files All

/Enter/Setup/Return

4:3

16:9

Note:

If the DVD disc is not formatted in the pan & scan style, it displays 4:3 style.

E.B.L. (Enhanced Black Level)

To select the black level of playback pictures, set your preference and monitor’s ability.

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

Setting E.B.L.

1 Press SETUP in the stop mode or No Disc.

Press or to select “Picture”.

VCR MENU

SETUP Language Picture Sound Parental Other

4 To make SETUP screen disappear, press SETUP or RETURN while the SETUP screen is being displayed.

VCR MENU

SETUP

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

/Enter/Setup/Return

RETURN

2 Press or ENTER, then press or to select

“E.B.L.”.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Display

Off

4:3

JPEG Interval

Select Files

Off

All

/Enter/Setup/Return

3 Press / or ENTER to select “On” or “Off”.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Display

4:3

JPEG Interval

Select Files

Off

All

/Enter/Setup/Return

On: Enhanced grey scale (0 IRE cut off)

Off: Standard grey scale (7.5 IRE cut off)

DISPLAY

Setting on screen display/Status display of disc

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

Setting on screen display

On screen display can be switched on or off when you press the buttons.

1 Press SETUP in the stop mode or No Disc.

Press or to select “Picture”.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

SET +

/Enter/Setup/Return

3 Press / or ENTER to select “On” or “Off”.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Display

JPEG Interval

Off

4:3

Off

Select Files All

/Enter/Setup/Return

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET – On: On screen displays appear when you press the buttons (factory setting).

Off: On screen displays do not appear when you press any buttons.

2 Press or ENTER, then press or to select

“Display”.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

E.B.L.

Tv Screen

Display

JPEG Interval

Off

4:3

Off

Select Files All

/Enter/Setup/Return

4 To make SETUP screen disappear, press SETUP or

RETURN while the SETUP screen is being displayed.

VCR MENU

SETUP

RETURN

DVD

VCD

Status display of disc

Each press of DISPLAY, the status display of the disc will appear on the screen and change as follows.

DVD

00:34:56 01:12:33

Title

1/8

1/32

1/99

00:34:56 01:12:33

Chapter 1/999

Eng DolbyDigital

1/9

Eng

Video CD

00:12 04:32

Audio CD

Track 11/99

34:56 71:33

PBC

Track -/-

00:12 04:32

To make status display disappear, press DISPLAY again.

When you playback the CD disc, the status display will appear on the screen and continue displaying.

Function setup (DVD)

Dynamic Range Control

DRC (Dynamic Range Control) enables you to control the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

Dynamic Range Control

1 Press SETUP in the stop mode.

Press or to select “Sound”.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

4 To make SETUP screen disappear, press SETUP or RETURN while the SETUP screen is being displayed.

VCR MENU

SETUP

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

/Enter/Setup/Return

RETURN

2 Press or ENTER to select “Dialogue”.

SET + Language Picture Sound Parental Other

Dialogue Off

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

/Enter/Setup/Return

Notes:

• This function works only during playback of Dolby Digital recorded discs.

• The level of Dynamic Range Reduction may differ depending on DVD video disc.

3 Press or ENTER, then press or to select desired setting.

SET +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

Dialogue Off On : DRC(TV)

Off : DRC(Std)

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

/Enter/Setup/Return

On:

Off:

Loud sound such as explosion or the like is toned down slightly when played back. This makes it suitable for when it is connected to a stereo.

It plays back at the recording level on the disc.

Function setup (DVD)

To change the parental level

OPEN/CLOSE

0–9

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

To change the parental level

1 Press SETUP in the stop mode or No Disc.

Press or to select “Parental”.

Then press or ENTER.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Language Picture

Password

Parental

Sound Parental Other

SET +

0 9/Cancel

/Enter/Setup/Return

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

5 Press or to select “Password”, then press number buttons (0–9) to enter the password.

SET +

Note: You can change the password if you want.

CH – CH +

ENTER

1 2

SET –

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

Password

Parental

9 8 7 6

9 0

0 9/Cancel

/Enter/Setup/Return

2 Press number buttons (0–9) to enter the password you have stored.

Language Picture Sound

Password

Parental

1 2 3 4

Parental Other

7 8 9 0

0 9/Cancel

/Enter/Setup/Return

6 Press ENTER.

CH –

SET +

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Now the parental level is changed and locked.

Language Picture Sound

Password

Parental 5

Parental Other

0 9/Cancel

/Enter/Setup/Return

3 Press ENTER.

The rating is now unlocked.

SET +

CH – CH +

Language Picture

Password

Parental

Sound Parental Other

ENTER

SET –

0 9/Cancel

/Enter/Setup/Return

7 Press SETUP or RETURN to remove the parental control screen.

VCR MENU

SETUP

RETURN

4 Press or to select “Parental”, then press

or to change the parental level.

SET +

Language Picture

Password

Parental

Sound Parental Other

5 CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

/Enter/Setup/Return

If you forget the password...

1. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.

2. Remove the disc.

3. Press OPEN/CLOSE again to close the disc tray.

“No Disc” appears on the screen.

4. While holding 7 down on the remote control, press

STOP on the front panel. “PASSWORD CLEAR” appears on the screen.

5. Enter a new password again.

Parental control setting

Some discs are specified not suitable for children. Such discs can be limited not to play back with the unit.

0–9

▲ / ▼ / /

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

CANCEL

Parental control setting

1 Press SETUP in the stop mode or No Disc.

Press or to select “Parental”. Then press

or ENTER.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Language

Password

Parental

Picture Sound Parental Other

Off

SET +

0 9/Cancel

/Enter/Setup/Return

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

4 Press ENTER to store the password.

SET +

Note: Now the rating is locked and the setting cannot be changed unless you enter the correct password.

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

Language Picture Sound

Password

Parental 1

Parental Other

0 9/Cancel

/Enter/Setup/Return

2 Press or to select “Parental”, then press

or until the level you require appears.

SET +

CH – CH +

Language Picture

Password

Parental

Sound Parental Other

ENTER

SET –

/Enter/Setup/Return

5 Press SETUP or RETURN to remove the parental control screen.

VCR MENU

SETUP

RETURN

• Level Off: The parental control setting does not function.

• Level 8: All DVD software can be played back.

• Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be played back.

• Select from the level 1 to level 8. The limitation will be more severe as the level number is lower.

3 Press or to select “Password”.

Press number buttons (0-9) to input a 4-digit password.

SET +

CH – CH +

Language Picture Sound

Password

Parental

1 2 3 4

Parental Other

ENTER

SET –

0 9/Cancel

/Enter/Setup/Return

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9 0

Be sure to remember this number!

• If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.

Notes:

• If each setup (pages 57~66) has been completed, the unit can always be worked under the same conditions (especially with DVD discs).

Each setup will be retained in the memory if you turn the power off.

• Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.

• Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating level information though its disc jacket says “adult.” For those discs, the age restriction will not work.

Temporary disabling of rating level by DVD disc

Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level that you have set.

It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.

OPEN/CLOSE

0–9

PLAY

▲ / ▼

RETURN

ENTER

Temporary disabling of rating level by DVD disc

1 Load a DVD disc and press PLAY or OPEN/

CLOSE on the unit (see page 42).

PLAY

Enter the password with number buttons (0–9).

Then press ENTER.

2 3

If you interrupt the entering, press

RETURN.

4 5 6

7 8 9 0

Please enter the

SET +

CH – CH +

Enter/0 9/Cancel/Return

ENTER

SET –

2 If the DVD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the Rating level, the screen which follows the “Reading” screen will change, depending on which disc is played. If you select “YES” with the

ENTER key, “Your disc exceeds the parental control level#.” screen will then appear.

Reading

Your disc exceeds the parental control level#.

Parental Control Level

Cancel Picture

/Enter/Return

RETURN

Playback will commence if the entered password was correct.

3 If you wish to cancel the set rating level temporarily, select “Parental Control Level” with or , then press ENTER. If the 4-digit password at step 2 on page 62 has been set, the password entering screen will appear as shown in step 4.

Alternatively, if the password has not been set, playback will commence. If you don’t know (or have forgotten) the password, select “Cancel Picture”.

The setting screen will disappear. Press OPEN/

CLOSE to remove the disc.

Note:

This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the disc is ejected.

When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again automatically.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Function setup (DVD)

Setting OSD language

The setup language can be selected.

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

DVD

VCD

Setting OSD language

1 Press SETUP in the stop mode or NO DISC.

Press or to select “Other”.

VCR MENU

SETUP Language Picture Sound Parental Other

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

/Enter/Setup/Return

4 To make SETUP screen disappear, press SETUP or RETURN while the SETUP screen is being displayed.

VCR MENU

SETUP

RETURN

2 Press or ENTER to select “OSD Language”.

SET +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

OSD Language English

CH – CH +

ENTER

SET –

If the unit does not operate properly: Static electricity, etc., may affect the player's operation. Disconnect the

AC power cord once, then connect it again.

/Enter/Setup/Return

3 Press or ENTER and then press or to select desired language (e.g. English), then press ENTER.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

OSD Language English English

Francais

Espanol

/Enter/Setup/Return

Function setup (DVD)

Selecting PROGRESSIVE scan

The progressive scan capability provides the highest resolution pictures with less flicker and line structure.

If you are using the Component video jacks, but are connecting the DVD/VCR to a standard (analog) television, set PROGRESSIVE to Off.

If you are using the Component video jacks for connection to a TV or monitor that is compatible with a progressive scan signal, set PROGRESSIVE to On.

VCR DVD

DVD

VCD

Selecting PROGRESSIVE scan

Preparation:

• Connect to a TV equipped with component jacks.

• Turn ON the TV and set it to the corresponding video input mode.

• Set the S-VIDEO/COMPONENT video selector switch on the rear panel to COMPONENT position.

• Press VCR DVD selector to select the DVD mode. (The

DVD indicator will light.)

Press PROGRESSIVE in the stop mode.

INPUT SELECT

PROGESSIVE

The progressive indicator “ ” on the display window will light.

• The unit recognizes the picture source (film or video) of the current disc according to the disc information.

Press PLAY to start playback.

PLAY

There are two types of source content in pictures recorded in

DVD video discs: film content (pictures recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per second).

When the unit plays back a film source material, uninterlaced progressive output signals are created using the original information. When a video content is played back, the unit interleaves lines between the interlaced lines on each to create the interpolated picture and outputs as the progressive signal.

To select PROGRESSIVE scan Off

Press PROGRESSIVE in the stop mode.

The progressive indicator “ ” on the display window will go off.

Notes:

• Some discs may not be played back with the progressive scanning mode correctly because of the disc characteristics or recording condition.

• If your TV does not accept the progressive scan format, the picture will appear scrambled if you select progressive scan output from the unit. In such a case, select PROGRESSIVE scan Off.

• Once PROGRESSIVE scan On, all other video outputs are disabled except component video outputs.

• You cannot make the progressive scanning mode active in following cases.

– The unit is in the VCR mode.

– The disc is played back in the DVD mode.

– The S-VIDEO/COMPONENT video selector switch is set to

S-VIDEO position.

Setting language

You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio” if their languages are recorded onto the disc more than one language.

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

▲ / ▼ / /

Setting language

1 Press SETUP in the stop mode or No Disc.

Press or to select “Language”.

VCR MENU

SETUP

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

4 To make SETUP screen disappear, press SETUP or RETURN while the SETUP screen is being displayed.

VCR MENU

SETUP

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

/Enter/Setup/Return

RETURN

2 Press or ENTER, then press or to select desired langugage item.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

Subtitle

Audio

English

Automatic

English

Note:

If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the firstpriority language is selected.

/Enter/Setup/Return

3 Press or ENTER.

Press or to select your desired language, then press ENTER.

SET +

CH –

ENTER

SET –

CH +

Language Picture Sound Parental Other

Subtitle

Audio

English

Automatic

English

Francais

Espanol

Other

/Enter/Setup/Return

English, Francais, Espanol:

The selected language will be heard or seen.

Other:

Other language can be selected (see “Language code list” on page 67).

Original: (Audio)

The unit will select the first priority language of each disc.

Automatic: (Subtitle)

• The unit will automatically select the same language in the AUDIO setting.

• When the unit selects the same language as the AUDIO, the subtitles will not appear during playback.

• When you do not use the same language as the AUDIO, the subtitles will appear during playback.

Off: (Subtitle)

Subtitles do not appear.

Others

Language code list

Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” (see pages 65).

Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code

Abkhazian

Afar

Afrikaans

1112

1111

1116

Fiji

Finnish

French

1620

1619

1628

Lingala

Lithuanian

Macedonian

2224

2230

2321

Singhalese

Slovak

Slovenian

2919

2921

2922

Albanian

Amharic

Arabic

Armenian

2927

1123

1128

1835

Frisian

Galician

Georgian

German

1635

1722

2111

1415

Malagasy

Malay

Malayalam

Maltese

2317

2329

2322

2330

Somali

Spanish

Sundanese

Swahili

2925

1529

2931

2933

Assamese

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Bashkir

1129 Greek

1135 Greenlandic

1136 Guarani

1211 Gujarati

Basque 1531 Hausa

Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew

Bhutani

Bihari

1436

1218

Hindi

Hungarian

1522

2122

1724

1731

1811

1933

1819

1831

Maori

Marathi

Moldavian

Mongolian

Nauru

Nepali

Norwegian

Oriya

2319

2328

2325

2324

2411

2415

2425

2528

Swedish

Tagalog

Tajik

Tamil

Tatar

Telugu

Thai

Tibetan

2932

3022

3017

3011

3030

3015

3018

1225

Breton

Bulgarian

1228 Icelandic

1217 Indonesian

Burmese 2335 Interlingua

Byelorussian 1215 Irish

Cambodian 2123 Italian

Catalan

Chinese

Corsican

Croatian

1311

3618

1325

1828

Japanese

Javanese

Kannada

Kashmiri

Czech

Danish

Dutch

English

Esperanto

Estonian

Faroese

1329

1411

2422

1524

Kazakh

Kirghiz

Korean

Kurdish

1929 Panjabi

1911 Persian

1711 Polish

1930 Portuguese

2611 Tigrinya

1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga

1611

2622

2630

Turkish

Turkmen

Twi

3019

3025

3028

3021

3033

2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian

2033 Rhaeto-Romance2823 Urdu

2124 Romanian

2129 Russian

2825 Uzbek

3121

3128

3136

2831 Vietnamese 3219

2121 Samoan

2135 Sanskrit

2125 Scots Gaelic

2131 Serbian

2923 Volapük

2911 Welsh

1714 Wolof

2928 Xhosa

1525 Laothian

1530 Latin

2225

2211

Serbo-Croatian 2918

Shona

1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi

2924

2914

Yiddish

Yoruba

Zulu

3225

1335

3325

3418

2019

3525

3631

Others

Troubleshooting

Check the following guide for the possible cause of a problem before contacting service.

DVD/VCR

SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS

DVD/VCR does not operate.

No picture.

No sound.

The remote control does not function.

No CATV reception.

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in.

• Try another AC outlet.

• Power is off, check fuse or circuit breaker.

• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.

• Select the DVD or VCR mode before operating.

• Antenna connection is not correct or antenna cable is disconnected.

• The video channel is not in the correct position or the TV is not set to the video channel 3 or 4.

• Check the unit is connected correctly.

• The video input selector of the TV is not set to VIDEO. Set to VIDEO (or equivalent).

• Channel is set to the external mode.

• Check the unit is connected correctly.

• Check the input selector of the amplifier is set properly.

• The unit is in the Special playback mode.

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.

• Operate within Approx. 7 Meters or reduce the light in the room.

• Clear the path of the beam.

• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.

• Check the batteries are inserted correctly.

• Check all CATV connections.

• Station or CATV system problems, try another station.

VCR

TV recording does not work.

Timer recording does not work.

Noise bars on screen.

• The erase prevention tab of the video cassette is broken off.

• The unit is in the external input mode.

• The time is not set correctly.

• The recording start/end time is not set correctly.

• The TIMER REC has not been pressed ( is not lit).

• Tracking adjustment beyond range of automatic tracking circuit. Try Manual tracking adjustment.

• Video heads are dirty.

• The tape is worn or damaged.

DVD

Display is not shown in your language.

• Select proper language in the menu options.

Playback doesn’t start.

• No disc is inserted.

• The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc.

• The unit cannot play DVD-ROMs, etc.

Stopping playback, slow-motion play, repeat play, or memory play, etc. cannot be performed.

• Some discs may not do some of the functions.

No picture, or the screen is blurred or divided into two parts.

• The S-VIDEO/COMPONENT selector is not set correctly.

• The PROGRESSIVE scan is On through the unit is connected to a TV via the VIDEO OUT or the S-VIDEO OUT jack.

No 4:3 (16:9) picture.

No on-screen display.

No surround sound.

The unit or remote operation key is not functioning.

Playback does not start when the title is selected.

Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle language is not changed when you play back a DVD.

• The setup does not match your TV.

• Select Display “On”.

• The setup does not match your stereo system.

• Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes, then replug it.

• Check the Parental setup.

• Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc.

No subtitle.

Angle cannot be changed.

• Some discs have no subtitles.

• Subtitles are cleared. Press SUB TITLE.

• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc.

appears on the screen.

• The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc.

PAGE

–

30,42

14~17

14~19

–

14~19

–

31,44

16,17

29,34

–

61,62

–

Others

Limited warranty

Specifications

General

Power supply

Power consumption

Weight

Dimensions

Tuner

Antenna input/output

RF channel output

Color system

Video head

Audio track

Hi-Fi frequency response

Hi-Fi dynamic range

F.FWD/REW time at 25˚C (77˚F)

Applicable disc

Frequency range

S/N ratio

Harmonic distortion

Wow and flutter

Operating conditions

Input/Output

DVD/VCR

Video input

Video output

Audio input

Audio output

AC 120 V 60 Hz

Operation: 18 W, Stand by: 2 W

7.9 lbs (3.6 kg)

Width: 16-15/16 inches (430 mm)

Height: 3-7/8 inches (99 mm)

Depth: 9-13/16 inches (250.5 mm)

181 channel freq. synthesized

VHF 2-13

UHF 14-69

CATV 125 Channels

UHF/VHF In/Out: 75

Ω coaxial

Channel 3 or 4, Switchable

NTSC

4 Rotary heads

Hi-Fi sound - 2 Tracks / MONO sound - 1 Track

20 Hz to 20,000 Hz

More than 90dB

Approx. 1 minute and 48 seconds (with T-120 Cassette Tape)

DVD (12 cm, 8 cm), CD (12 cm, 8 cm)

DVD: 4 Hz-22 kHz, CD: 4 Hz-20 kHz

90dB (DVD)

0.02% (DVD)

Less than 0.01% Wrms

Temperature: 5˚C-40˚C (41˚F-104˚F), Operating status: Horizontal

1.0 V (p-p), 75

Ω

, negative sync., pin jack x 2

1.0 V (p-p), 75

Ω

, negative sync., pin jack x 1

–8 dBm, 50 k

Ω

, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2

–8 dBm, 1 k

Ω

, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 1

DVD

S-video output

Component video output

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75

Ω

, negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin

Ω

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75

Ω

, negative sync., pin jack

)/(P

) 0.7 V (p-p), 75

Ω

, pin jack

0.5 V (p-p), 75

Ω

, pin jack

Audio output (BITSTREAM/PCM

COAXIAL)

Audio output (BITSTREAM/PCM Optical connector

OPTICAL)

Audio output (ANALOG) –12 dB, 1 k

Ω

, pin jacks (L, R)

S-VIDEO/COMPONENT video selector Slide switch

Supplied accessories

Audio/video cable ................................................. 1

Remote control (SE-R0108) ................................. 1

Batteries (R03/AAA) ............................................. 2

75 ohm coaxial cable ............................................ 1

• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.

70 71

CAUTION

THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CARE-

FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE,

CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN

THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE.

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT

STARE INTO BEAM.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE

STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

PREPARATION OF SERVICING

The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity.

Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the time of repair, a life of product may become short.

Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode enough at the time of repair, and work.

• It works on the desk which performed measures against static electricity, such as conductive mat.

• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.

• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.

A1-1

IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION

Safety precautions to be followed during servicing:

1.

2. Parts marked with an are critical parts for safety. Replace only with the one described in the parts list.

Before returning the DVD product to the customer, make the appropriate leakage current check or resistance measurements to ensure that exposed parts are properly insulated from the supply circuit.

A leakage current check is recommended for this unit. Plug the AC line cord directly into a 120V 60Hz AC outlet (do not use an isolation transformer for this check). Use a leakage current tester (Fig. 1) or a metering system which complies with Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1409). Measure for current from all exposed metal parts of the cabinet to a known earth ground: particularly, any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis. Any current measured must not exceed 0.5mA. Any measurement not within the limits outlined above are indicative of a potential shock hazard and corrective action must be taken before returning the unit to the customer.

(Reading should not be above 0.5mA)

Leakage Current Tester

1.5K ohm

0.15

PRODUCT UNDER TEST

2-Blade polarized type cord set

Test all exposed metal surfaces

TEST PROBE

Fig. 1 AC Leakage Test

KNOWN EARTH

GROUND

A1-2

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

8A.

with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer.

An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.

VENTILATION

10.

S3125A

Slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the unit on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

POWER SOURCES

11.

READ INSTRUCTIONS

All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS

The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

HEED WARNINGS

All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS

All operating and use instructions should be followed.

CLEANING

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

ATTACHMENTS

Do not use attachments not recommended by the unit’s manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

WATER AND MOISTURE

Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

ACCESSORIES

PORTABLE CART WARNING

(symbol provided by RETAC)

Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The

unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit. Use only

12.

13.

14.

GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION

This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other).

This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. If your unit is equipped with a 3-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin, this plug will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This too, is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.

POWER-CORD PROTECTION

LIGHTNING

POWER LINES

An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be

15.

16.

fatal.

OVERLOADING

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY

A1-3

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

(CONTINUED)

17.

18.

19.

OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING

If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National

Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

SERVICING

Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a.

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.

If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.

If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.

If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in e.

damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal operation.

If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original parts.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

SAFETY CHECK

Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING

The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

HEAT

The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

DISC TRAY

Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.

CONNECTING

SOUND VOLUME

Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume sound may cause hearing or speaker damage.

SOUND DISTORTION

Do not allow the product output distorted sound for a longtime. It may cause speaker overheating and fire.

HEADPHONES

When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continuously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.

LASER BEAM

Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the laser beam. It may cause sight damage.

DISC

Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal injury and product malfunction.

NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER

A1-4

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

(CONTINUED)

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA LEAD

IN WIRE

GROUND

CLAMP

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

S2898A

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810-20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250, PART H)

A1-5

TAPE REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY

Remove the Top Cabinet, Front Cabinet and DVD Block. (Refer to item 1 of the

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)

Remove the screw 1 of the Deck Chassis and remove the Loading Motor. (Refer to Fig. 2)

Rotate the Pinch Roller Cam in the direction of the arrow by hand to slacken the Video Tape.

Rotate the Clutch Ass'y either of the derections to wind the Video Tape in the Cassette Case.

Repeat the above step 3~4. Then take out the Video Cassette from the Deck Chassis. Be careful not to scratch on the tape.

Loading Motor

Screw 1

Capstan DD Unit

Pinch Roller Cam

Fig. 1

Main Cam

Main Chassis (Front Side)

Fig. 2

Clutch Ass'y

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY

Remove the Top Cabinet and Front Cabinet. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)

Slide the Rack Loading (White) toward the arrow direction by using a minus driver to release the lock.

(Refer to Fig. 1)

Draw the Tray.

Rack Loading

(White) DVD Deck

Fig. 1

A1-6

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL

4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION

If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

Press and hold the '7' key on the remote control unit.

Simultaneously press and hold the 'STOP' key on the front panel.

Hold both keys for more than 3 seconds.

The On Screen Display message 'PASSWORD CLEAR' will appear.

The 4 digit password has now been cleared

TRAY LOCK

Tray cannot be opened by setting the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

Press and hold the 'CM SKIP' key on the remote control unit.

Simultaneously press and hold the 'DVD STOP' key on the front panel.

Hold both keys for more than 3 seconds.

Press the OPEN/CLOSE key on the front panel to check the Tray Lock setting.

NB: No indications on the screen when the Tray Lock is setting.

To unlock the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

Press and hold the 'CM SKIP' key on the remote control unit.

Simultaneously press and hold the 'DVD STOP' key on the front panel.

Hold both keys for more than 3 second.

The On Screen Display message ' ' will appear.

The Tray Lock has now been cleared.

NB: The above procedure will reset ALL of the player's settings to the default factory state.

A1-7

TABLE OF CONTENTS

• OWNER'S MANUAL

CAUTION ....................................................................................................................................

IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION ...................................................................

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .....................................................................................................

TAPE REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ............................................................

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY .............................................................

PARENTAL CONTROL-RATING LEVEL ..................................................................................

TRAY LOCK ................................................................................................................................

TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS ............................................

2. REMOVAL OF VCR DECK PARTS ...................................................................................

3. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS ...................................................................................

4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC ...............................................

KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................................

SERVICE MODE LIST ................................................................................................................

PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS ..............................................................

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE ............................................................................................

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC ..........................................................................

RF SIGNAL CHECK OF DVD PCB ............................................................................................

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS .......................................................................................

PREPARATION FOR SERVICING .............................................................................................

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................................

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................................

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................................................................................................

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

DVD ..........................................................................................................................................

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP .................................................................................................

SYSTEM CONTROL ...............................................................................................................

OPERATION/DISPLAY ...........................................................................................................

Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR ............................................................................................................

TUNER/JACK ..........................................................................................................................

POWER ...................................................................................................................................

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD ..........................................................................................................................................

VCR .........................................................................................................................................

OPERATION 1/OPERATION 2/FRONT JACK/RELAY/SW ..................................................

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

MPEG/MICON ........................................................................................................................

MEMORY ................................................................................................................................

RF AMP/DSP ..........................................................................................................................

AUDIO/VIDEO ........................................................................................................................

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP ................................................................................................

SYSCON ..................................................................................................................................

TUNER/JACK ..........................................................................................................................

OPERATION/DISPLAY ...........................................................................................................

Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR ............................................................................................................

POWER ...................................................................................................................................

OPERATION1,2/FRONT AV JACK .........................................................................................

RELAY/SW/FG ........................................................................................................................

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................

WAVEFORMS .............................................................................................................................

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW .............................................................................................

CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW .....................................................................................................

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ...................................................................................................

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST .........................................................................

CHASSIS REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ..................................................................................

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...............................................................................

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...........................................................................

A1-1

A1-2

A1-3~A1-5

A1-6

A1-7

A2-1

A3-1~A3-7

B1-1, B1-2

B2-1~B2-6

B3-1~B3-4

B4-1, B4-2

C1-1, C1-2

C2-1

C3-1, C3-2

C4-1

C4-2

C4-3

D1-1

D2-1~D2-4

D3-1, D3-2

E-1~E-33

F-1, F-2

F-3, F-4

F-5, F-6

F-7, F-8

F-9, F-10

F-11, F-12

F-13, F-14

G-1,G-2

G-3~G-6

G-7, G-8

H-1, H-2

H-3, H-4

H-5, H-6

H-7, H-8

H-9, H-10

H-11, H-12

H-13, H-14

H-15, H-16

H-17, H-18

H-19, H-20

H-21, H-22

H-23, H-24

H-25, H-26

I-1, I-2

J1-1, J1-2

J2-1, J2-2

J3-1

K1-1

K2-1

K3-1

K4-1~K4-15

A2-1

G-1

G-2

G-3

G-4

G-5

G-6

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Outline of the product

DVD System Color System

Disc

Disc Diameter

Deck

Pick up

Playback time (Max)

VCR

System

Tuning

System

Power

Regulation

Search speed

Slow speed

Disc Loading System

Motor

DVD 2-Layer

VIDEO CD

System

Video System

Hi-Fi STEREO

NTSC PB(PAL60Hz)

Deck

Heads

DECK

Loading System

Video Head

Motor

FM Audio Head

Audio /Control

Erase(Full Track Erase)

Tape

Speed

Rec

Play

PAL

NTSC

PAL

NTSC

Fast Forward / Rewind Time (Approx.) at 25oC

Forward/Reverse

Picture Search

Frame Advance

Slow Speed

Broadcasting System

Tuner and

Receive CH

NTSC or PAL-M

PAL or SECAM

System

Destination

Tuning System

Input Impedance

CH Coverage

Intermediate Picture(FP)

Frequency Sound(FS)

FP-FS

Preset CH

RF Converter Output

Channel

Level/Impedance

Sound Selector

Stereo/Dual TV Sound

Tuner Sound Muting

Power Source AC

Power Consumption

Protector

Stand by

Per Year

Power Fuse

Safety

Radiation

Laser

DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VHS Player / Recorder

NTSC

DVD, CD-DA, CD-R/RW, VIDEO CD,

SVCD, DVD-R/RW (VIDEO FORMAT ONLY)

120 mm , 80 mm

Front Disc Loading

2 Motors

1-Lens 2-Beams System

135min (4.7GB)

245min (8.5GB)

74min

Fwd 2-100 times / 4 step

Actual 2-45 times (DVD, VIDEO CD)

4-40 times (CD)

Rev 2-100 times / 4 step

Actual 2-45 times (DVD, VIDEO CD)

4-40 times (CD)

Fwd 1/7-1/2 times

Actual --

Rev --

Actual --

VHS Player / Recorder

NTSC

Yes

OVD-7

Front

4Head

2Head

Mono/Yes

Yes

SP/SLP(EP)

FF:1'48"/REW:1'48" with Cassette T-120

SP/LP/SLP(EP) = 3x,5x / 7x,9x / 9x,15x

Yes

1/10

US System M

1Tuner

US (w/CATV)

F-Synth

VHF/UHF 75 OHM

2~69,4A,A-5~A-1,A~I

J~W,W+1-W+84

41.25 MHz

4.50 MHz

Yes

3 or 4 ch

66 dBu / 75 Ohm

US-ST

Yes

120V 60Hz

18 W at 120V 60Hz

2 W at 120V 60Hz

-- W

Yes

UL / CSA

FCC / IC

DHHS

A3-1

G-7

G-8

G-9

Temperature

Operating Humidity

Signal Video Signal

RGB Signal

Audio Signal

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hi-Fi Audio Signal

Operation

Storage

Output Level

S/N Ratio (Weighted)

Horizontal Resolution

Output Level

Input Level Microphone

Input Level Line

65 dB(DVD)

500 Lines (DVD)

5oC - 40oC

-20oC - 60oC

Less than 80% RH

1 V p-p/75 ohm (DVD,VCR)

50 dB(VCR)

230 Lines(VCR Mode)

-8 dBm/ 50k ohm(VCR)

Output Level Line

Digital Output Level

S/N Ratio at (Weighted)

Harmonic Distortion (1KHz) Typical

Frequency Response : DVD Mode at DVD

-8 dBm/ 1k ohm (VCR, 0dBm=0.775Vrms)

-12dBm/ 1k ohm (DVD, -20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)

0.5 V p-p / 75 ohm(DVD)

90dB(DVD), 42dB(VCR at SP)

0.02% (DVD), 1.5% (VCR at SP)

4 Hz - 22 KHz

DVD Mode at VIDEO CD 4 Hz - 20 KHz

DVD Mode at SVCD 4 Hz - 20 KHz

DVD Mode at CD 4 Hz - 20 KHz

VCR Mode at SP 100Hz - 10kHz

VCR Mode at LP -

VCR Mode at SLP 100Hz - 4kHz

Dynamic Range : More than

Frequency Response

Wow And Flutter : Less than

Channel Separation : More than

Harmonic Distortion : Less than

90dB

20Hz ~20kHz

0.01 %Wrms

60 dB

0.01

A3-2

G-10 On Screen

Display (DVD)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Menu Type

Language

Sub Title

Audio

Picture

TV Screen Size

OSD Display On/Off

JPEG Interval

Select Files

E.B.L. (Enhanced Black Level)

Sound

DRC (Dynamic Range Control) dts Decode

Output (5.1ch/2ch)

Surround On/Off

Yes

Character

Yes

Parental

Center On/Off

Sub Woofer On/Off

Password Lock/Unlock

Rating Level

Other

OSD Language (Set up Language)

Output (RGB/Composite)

Open

No disc

Reading

Play

Still/Pause

Stop

Prohibit Mark

Step

Skip (>>|)

Skip (|<<)

Random

Repeat

Slow+ ##

Slow- ##

Search+ ##

Search- ##

Yes

Yes (CD, VIDEO CD,SVCD MP3, WMA, JPEG )

Yes

Jump

Resume

Title No.

Chapter No.

Track No.

Time

Sub Title No.

Angle No.

Progressive Scan Out ON/OFF

Yes

Vocal On/Off

Audio No.

Audio Stereo L/R

Zoom

Yes

Yes (VIDEO CD, SVCD)

Yes

Marker No.

Spatializer (N-2-2)

Yes

Program Play Back Yes (CD, VIDEO CD, SVCD, MP3, WMA, JPEG )

MP3/WMA/JPEG Folder Name Yes

File Name Yes

File No Yes

Time Yes (MP3, WMA Only)

Track No Yes

Yes

A3-3

G-11

G-12

G-13

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

On Screen

Display(VCR)

OSD Language

Clock,Timer and Timer

Back-up

Display

Menu Type

Timer Rec Set

Auto Repeat On/Off

SAP On/Off

CH Set-Up

TV/CATV

Auto CH Memory

Add/Delete

System Set Up

Clock Set

Language

No Noise Back Ground

Auto Clock

Standard Time

Daylight Saving Time

G-CODE (or SHOWVIEW or PLUSCODE) No. Entry

Stereo, Audio Output, SAP

Yes

Character

Yes

Yes (Calendar 12H)

Yes

Play/Stop/FF/Rew/Rec/OTR(ITR)/T-Rec/Pause/Eject/Tape In

(Symbol Mark)

CH/AV (LINE)

Calendar

Timer Events

DVD OSD

VCR OSD

OTPB Valid Time

Clock

Repeat

Tape Counter

Index

Tape Speed

ATR / Manual Tracking

Hi-Fi

Zero Return

One Touch Recording Max Time

Yes

Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode)

DISPLAY

DISPLAY type

Clock/Counter,CH,Timer Rec,OTR, Play

Rec,FF(Cue),Rew(Rev),Stop,ATR,Eject

VCR

DVD

Clock

Yes

Yes (12h)

PM Yes

Counter VCR Yes (hour:min)

DVD Yes (hour:min)

CD Yes (min:sec)

Yes Eject

Counter Remain

Play

Stop

Yes

Yes Rec

FF / Cue

REW /Review

Pause/Still

OTR

T-Rec

Chapter

TITLE

TRACK

Repeat

Hi-Fi

SLP

RF Output CH

Tape In

Remocon Custom Code

Progressive Scan Out

Yes

Eng Fre Spa

1990/1/1 ~ 2081/12/31

8 Program/ 1 Month

6 Hours

5 sec

Yes

LED Module (Amber, "Rec" &Timer symbol = Red)

Yes

A3-4

G-14 Remote

Control

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Unit

Glow in Dark Remocon

Format

Custom Code

Power Source

Total Keys

Keys

Voltage(D.C)

UM size x pcs

Power

DISPLAY/CALL

Yes

Input Select

Input Select / PROGRESSIVE

UP/ SET+ / TRACKING+

DOWN/ SET- / TRACKING-

LEFT/CH-

RIGHT/CH+

VCR/DVD

TV/VCR

DVD MENU

TITLE (TOP MENU)

SETUP MENU/VCR MENU

SELECT/ENTER

CLEAR/CANCEL

RETURN

Yes

PLAY Yes

STOP

PAUSE/STILL/STEP

FF(Cue)/SEARCH+

REW(Review)/SEARCH-

Yes

REC/OTR

SKIP+ / INDEX+

SKIP- / INDEX-

AUDIO / AUDIO SELECT

Yes

RC-HL

Yes

NEC (TOSHIBA)

45-BA

UM-4 x 2 pcs

46 Key

Yes

ANGLE/COUNTER RESET

SUB TITLE/ATR

PLAY MODE/SPEED

T-REC

CLOCK / COUNTER

JUMP/ZERO RETURN

ZOOM/CM SKIP

REPEAT A-B

SLOW(Forward)

MARKER

OPEN/CLOSE

EJECT

Yes

A3-5

G-15

G-16

Features

(DVD)

Features

(VCR)

Accessories

Auto Power Off

Parental Lock

Video CD Playback

MP3 Playback

WMA Playback

JPEG Playback

Progressive Scan Out

Digital Out

Down Mix Out

Dolby Digital

MPEG

PCM

DTS

(Dolby Digital)

(DTS)

Spatializer (N-2-2)

Screen Saver

Auto Stop

Tray Lock

Audio DAC

Auto Head Cleaning

Auto Tracking

HQ (VHS Standard High Quality)

Auto Power On, Auto Play, Auto Rewind, Auto Eject

Auto Power Off

Forward/Reverse Picture Search

VIDEO PLUS+ (SHOWVIEW, G-CODE)

One Touch Playback

Auto CH Memory

AREA CODE

Auto Clock Set

Index Search

SQPB (Option)

CATV

Energy Star

MTS (SAP)

CM Skip (30sec x 6 Times)

Copy Disc to Tape

Owner's Manual Language w/Guarantee Card

Remote Control Unit

Guarantee Card

Registration Card

Warning Sheet

Service Station List

Important Tag

AC Plug Adapter

Quick Set-up Sheet

Battery

UM size x pcs

AC Cord

AV Cord (1.2m)

75 Ohm Coaxial Cable (0.9m)

S-Video Cable

21pin cable

800 No Sticker

Toll Free Insert Sheet

Safety Tip

Sheet Information (Return)

Netflix Card

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Yes (Spanish)

Yes

UM-4 x 2 pcs

Yes

192kHz / 24bit

Yes

Yes (by Conditioning)

English

Yes

A3-6

G-17

G-18

G-19

G-20

G-21

G-22

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Interface

Set Size

Weight

Carton

Cabinet Material

Environment

Switch

Volume

Terminals

Indicator

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

LED

Power

Play

Eject (VCR)

Stop

Rec/OTR

Open/Close (DVD)

CH +

CH -

FF/ Search(>>)

Rew/Search(<<)

Still/Pause

Shuttle (Search/REV/FWD)

DVD/VCR

Main Power SW

Attenuator

S-Video/Component Video Selector

RF Out (Slide SW)

Main Power SW

Phones Volume

Mic Volume

Echo Volume

Rec/OTR

Video In

Audio In

Video Output

Audio Output

Optical Out (Option)

Video Input (Option)

Audio Input (Option)

RF Input / Output

Euro Scart

AC Inlet

Power

Rec

T-Rec

TV/VCR

DVD

VCR

Surround

Yes

RCA x 1 (Black/Silver)

RCA x 2 (Stereo, Black/Silver)

RCA x1 (Yellow)

S-Video x 1 (DVD Signal Only)

Component x1 (RCA 3pin, DVD Signal Only)

RCA x 4(Stereo, Red/White)

Coaxial x 1 (Digital Audio, DVD Signal Only)

Yes (Digital Audio, DVD Signal Only)

RCA x 1 (Yellow)

RCA x 2 (Stereo, Red/White)

Yes

Yes (GREEN)

Gift Box

Level Meter

Net (Approx.)

Gross (Approx.)

Approx. W x D x H (mm) 430 x 250.5 x 99

3.6kg (7.9lbs)

4.7kg (10.4lbs)

Master Carton

Content

Material

Dimensions W x D x H(mm)

Description of Origin

--- Sets

--- / ---

---

Yes

Double / White Material

W/Color Photo Label

Dimensions W x D x H(mm)

Design

Description of Origin

497 x 360 x 180

As Per BUYER 's

Yes

Natural Dropping At Drop Test

Height (cm)

Container Stuffing

Cabinet Front

PCB Non-Halogen Demand

Eyelet Demand

Pb Free Lead-free Solder

Other

Cd Free

1 Corner / 3 Edges / 6 Surfaces

80 cm

1,985 Sets/40' container

PS 94V2 or More / DECABROM

A3-7

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS

AND P.C. BOARDS

1-1: TOP CABINET, FRONT CABINET, OPERATION 1/2

PCB AND FRONT JACK PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-1)

Remove the 5 screws 1 .

Remove the Top Cabinet in the direction of arrow (A).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP651 and CP652).

Unlock the 8 supports 2 .

Remove the Front Cabinet in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 11 screws 3 .

Remove the Operation 1/2 PCB and Front Jack PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

Remove the 3 Pin Shield.

1-3: DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-3)

Make the short circuit on the position as shown Fig. 1-3

10.

using a soldering. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

Unlock the support 1 and remove the Deck Top Holder in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the 3 screws 2 .

Remove the screw 3 .

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP2601, CP2602 and CP2603).

Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 3 screws 4 .

Remove the Front Angle in the direction of arrow (C).

Remove the screw 5 .

Remove the DVD Angle.

Top Cabinet

Deck Top Holder

DVD Deck

Pick Up PCB

Operation 1 PCB

Front Jack PCB

3 Pin Shield

3 3

(A)

(B)

(C)

Operation 2 PCB

Front Cabinet

(A)

(C)

(B) Make the sort circuit using a soldering.

DVD Angle

Fig. 1-1

1-2: FLAP (Refer to Fig. 1-2)

Open Flap to 90˚ and flex in direction of arrow (A), at the same time slide in direction of arrow (B).

Then lift in direction of arrow (C).

Front Angle

Fig. 1-3

NOTE

When the installation of the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of

Pick Up PCB and DVD PCB connector.

(A)

(C)

(B)

Flap

Fig. 1-2

B1-1

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1-4: DVD PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-4)

Remove the 3 screws 1 .

Remove the 4 screws 2 .

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP4002 and CP8102).

Remove the DVD PCB in the direction of arrow.

1-6: VCR PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-6)

Remove the screw 1 .

Remove the 2 screws 2 .

Remove the screw 3 .

Remove the VCR PCB in the direction of arrow.

1 3

VCR PCB

DVD PCB

Fig. 1-4

1-5: VCR DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-5)

NOTE

Do not remove the cable at the FE Head section. The FE

Head may be damaged if you remove the cable by force.

Move the Cassette Holder Ass’y to the back side.

Remove the screw 1 .

Remove the FE Head.

Remove the 3 screws 2 .

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP101, CP102, and CP3001).

Remove the AC Head Cover and VCR Deck in the direction of arrow.

FE Head

AC Head Cover

VCR Deck

Fig. 1-6

Fig. 1-5

B1-2

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

2. REMOVAL OF VCR DECK PARTS

2-1: TOP BRACKET (Refer to Fig. 2-1)

Extend the 2 supports 1 .

Slide the 2 supports 2 and remove the Top Bracket.

NOTE

After the installation of the Top Bracket, bend the support

1 so that the Top Bracket is fixed.

NOTE

In case of the Locker R installation, check if the one position of Fig. 2-3-B are correctly locked.

When you install the Cassette Side R, be sure to move the Locker R after installing.

Locker R

Top Bracket

Check if this position is locked.

Cassette Side R

Top Bracket

Main Chassis Fig. 2-3-B

Main Chassis

Fig. 2-1

2-2: CASSETTE HOLDER ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-2)

Move the Cassette Holder Ass'y to the front side.

Push the Locker R to remove the Cassette Side R.

Remove the Cassette Side L.

2-4: LINK UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-4)

Set the Link Unit to the Eject position.

Unlock the support 1 .

Remove the (A) side of the Link Unit first, then remove the (B) side.

Cassette Side R

Locker R

Main Chassis

Link Unit

Main Chassis

Link Unit

Cassette Side L

2-3: CASSETTE SIDE L/R (Refer to Fig. 2-3-A)

Remove the Locker Spring.

Unlock the 4 supports 1 and then remove the Cassette

Side L/R.

Unlock the support 2 and then remove the Locker R.

Locker Spring

Cassette Holder

Locker R

Main Chassis

Fig. 2-2

Cassette Side R

Cassette Side L

Fig. 2-3-A

B2-1

(A)

Link Unit

(B)

Main Chassis

2-5: LINK LEVER/FLAP LEVER (Refer to Fig. 2-5)

Extend the support 1 .

Remove the Link Lever.

Remove the Flap Lever.

Fig. 2-4

Flap Lever

Link Lever

Fig. 2-5

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

2-6: LOADING MOTOR/WORM (Refer to Fig. 2-6-A)

Remove the screw 1 .

Remove the Loading Motor.

Remove the Worm.

Loading Motor

2-7: TENSION ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 2-7-B)

Turn the Pinch Roller Cam clockwise so that the Tension

Holder hook is set to the position of Fig. 2-7-A to move the Tension Arm Ass’y.

Remove the Tension Spring.

Unlock the 2 supports 1 and remove the Tension Band.

Unlock the support 2 and remove the Tension Arm Ass’y.

Unlock the support 3 and remove the Tension Connect.

Float the hook 4 and turn it clockwise then remove the

Tension Holder.

Worm

Tension Arm Ass’y

Main Chassis

• Screw Torque: 3 ± 0.5kgf•cm

Fig. 2-6-A

NOTE

In case of the Worm installation, check if the value of the

Fig. 2-6-B is correct.

In case of the Loading Motor installation, hook the wire on the Cassette Opener as shown Fig. 2-6-C.

When installing the wires between Capstan DD Unit and

Loading Motor, connect them correctly as shown Fig. 2-

6-D.

19.2

0.1mm

Fig. 2-7-A

Tension Connect

Tension Band

Tension Spring

Tension Holder

Tension Arm Ass’y

Safety surface for pressing of the insert.

Loading Motor

Pink

White

Fig. 2-6-B

Loading Motor

Cassette Opener

Fig. 2-6-C

Capstan DD Unit

Fig. 2-6-D

B2-2

Fig. 2-7-B

NOTE

In case of the Tension Band installation, note the direction of the installation. (Refer to Fig. 2-7-C)

In case of the Tension Band installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-7-D.

In case of the Tension Connect installation, install as the circled section of Fig. 2-7-E.

Tension Connect

Tension Band

Fig. 2-7-C

[OK]

[NG]

Tension Connect

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

Tension Band

Fig. 2-7-D

NOTE

Take care not to damage the gears of the S Reel and T

Reel.

The Polyslider Washer may be remained on the back of the reel.

Take care not to damage the shaft.

Do not touch the section “A” of S Reel and T Reel. (Use gloves.) (Refer to Fig. 2-9-A) Do not adhere the stains on it.

When you install the reel, clean the shaft and grease it.

(If you do not grease, noise may be heard in FF/REW mode.)

After installing the reel, adjust the height of the reel.

(Refer to MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT)

Main Chassis

Fig. 2-7-E

2-8: T BRAKE ARM/T BRAKE BAND (Refer to Fig. 2-8-A)

Remove the T Brake Spring.

Turn the T Brake Arm clockwise and bend the hook section to remove it.

Unlock the 2 supports 1 and remove the T Brake Band.

T Brake Band

Hook section

T Brake Arm

T Brake Spring

Idler Gear

S Reel

(B)

(A)

Idler Arm Ass’y

T Reel

(A)

Fig. 2-9-A

NOTE

In case of the S Reel and T Reel installation, check if the correct parts are installed. (Refer to Fig. 2-9-B)

In case of the Idler Arm Ass’y installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-9-C. And also set it so that the section “B” of

Fig. 2-9-A is placed under the Main Chassis tab.

Fig. 2-8-A

NOTE

1. In case of the T Brake Band installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-8-B.

T Brake Arm [OK]

T Brake Band

[NG]

T Brake Band

T Brake Arm

Fig. 2-8-B

2-9: S REEL/T REEL/IDLER ARM ASS’Y/IDLER GEAR

(Refer to Fig. 2-9-A)

Remove the S Reel and T Reel.

Remove the 2 Polyslider Washers 1 .

Remove the Idler Arm Ass’y and Idler Gear.

[OK]

Clutch Gear

[NG]

Clutch Gear

Big Hole

(S Reel)

Small Hole

(T Reel) Fig. 2-9-B

Idler Arm Ass’y

Fig. 2-9-C

B2-3

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

2-10: CASSETTE OPENER/PINCH ROLLER BLOCK/P5

ARM ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 2-10-A)

Unlock the support 1 and remove the Cassette Opener.

Remove the Pinch Roller Block and P5 Arm Ass’y.

Cassette Opener

Pinch Roller Block

P5 Arm Ass’y

Main Chassis

Spring Position Fig. 2-11-B

2-12: FE HEAD (RECORDER ONLY) (Refer to Fig. 2-12)

Remove the screw 1 .

Remove the FE Head.

FE Head

Fig. 2-10-A

NOTE

Do not touch the Pinch Roller. (Use gloves.)

In case of the Pinch Roller Block and the Pinch Roller

Cam installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-10-B.

Pinch Roller Block

P5 Arm Ass’y

Can be seen the hole of the Pinch Roller Cam.

Can be seen the hole of the

Main Cam.

Fig. 2-10-B

2-11: A/C HEAD (Refer to Fig. 2-11-A)

Remove the screw 1 .

Remove the A/C Head Base.

Remove the 3 screws 2 .

Remove the A/C Head and A/C Head Spring.

NOTE

Do not touch the A/C Head. (Use gloves.)

When you install the A/C Head Spring, install as shown in

Fig. 2-11-B.

When you install the A/C Head, tighten the screw (1) first, then tighten the screw (2), finally tighten the screw (3).

(2)

(1)

(3)

A/C Head

• Screw Torque: 5

0.5kgf•cm

• The FE Head is not installed on the Video Cassette Player.

Fig. 2-12

2-13: AHC ASS'Y/CYLINDER UNIT ASS'Y

(Refer to Fig. 2-13)

Unlock the support 1 and remove the AHC Ass'y.

Disconnect the following connector: (CD2001)

Remove the 3 screws 2 .

Remove the Cylinder Unit Ass'y.

NOTE

When you install the Cylinder Unit Ass'y, tighten the screws from (1) to (3) in order while pulling the Ass'y toward the left front direction.

Cylinder Unit Ass'y

AHC Ass'y

• Screw Torque: 5

0.5kgf•cm (Screw 1 )

A/C Head Spring

A/C Head Base

Fig. 2-11-A

B2-4

(1)

• Screw Torque: 3

0.5kgf•cm

(2)

(3)

Fig. 2-13

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

2-14: CAPSTAN DD UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-14-A)

Remove the Capstan Belt.

Remove the 3 screws 1 .

Remove the Capstan DD Unit.

2-15: MAIN CAM/PINCH ROLLER CAM/JOINT GEAR

(Refer to Fig. 2-15-A)

Remove the E-Ring 1 , then remove the Main Cam.

Remove the E-Ring 2 , then remove the Pinch Roller

Cam and Joint Gear.

Main Cam

Capstan Belt

Capstan DD Unit

Pinch Roller Cam

Joint Gear

• Screw Torque: 4

0.5kgf•cm

1 1

Fig. 2-14-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Capstan DD Unit installation, apply the silicon bond (TSE3843-W) on the position Fig. 2-14-B correctly. (If no silicon bond applied, abnormal noise will be heard on the deck operation.)

(Refer to Fig. 2-14-B, C)

Applied position of silicon bond

Part Name: TSE3843-W

Part No.: Y118011000

Be careful not to apply the silicon bond to the Pinch Roller.

Capstan DD Unit

Fig. 2-15-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Pinch Roller Cam and Main Cam installation, install them as the circled section of Fig. 2-15-B so that the each markers are met. (Refer to Fig. 2-15-B)

And also can be seen the Main Chassis hole through the

Main Cam maker hole.

Pinch Roller Cam

Marker

Main Cam

Fig. 2-14-B

Silicon Bond

Main Chassis

Fig. 2-14-C

Fig. 2-15-B

2-16: LOADING GEAR S/T UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-16-A)

Remove the E-Ring 1 and remove the Main Loading

Gear.

Remove the Main Rod, Tension Lever, Loading Arm S

Unit and Loading Arm T Unit.

Main Loading Gear

Main Rod

Loading Arm T Unit

Tension Lever

Loading Arm S Unit

Fig. 2-16-A

B2-5

Marker

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE

1. When you install the Loading Arm S Unit, Loading Arm T

Unit and Main Loading Gear, align each marker. (Refer to Fig. 2-16-B)

2-18: CASSETTE GUIDE POST/INCLINED BASE S/T

UNIT/P4 CAP (Refer to Fig. 2-18-A)

Remove the P4 Cap.

Unlock the support 1 and remove the Cassette Guide

Post.

Remove the Inclined Base S/T Unit.

Remove the screw 2 .

Remove the LED Reflector.

Main Loading Gear

Marker

Cassette Guide Post

Inclined Base S

Unit

Inclined Base T

Unit

P4 Cap

Loading Arm T Unit Loading Arm S Unit

Fig. 2-16-B

2-17: CLUTCH ASS’Y/RING SPRING/CLUTCH LEVER/

CLUTCH GEAR (Refer to Fig. 2-17-A)

Remove the Polyslider Washer 1 .

Remove the Clutch Ass’y and Ring Spring.

Remove the Clutch Lever.

Remove the Coupling Gear, Coupling Spring and Clutch

Gear.

Clutch Ass’y

Ring Spring

Coupling Gear

Coupling Spring

Clutch Gear

Clutch Lever

LED Reflector

• Screw Torque: 5 ± 0.5kgf•cm

Fig. 2-18-A

NOTE

Do not touch the roller of Guide Roller.

In case of the P4 Cap installation, install it with parallel for “A” and “B” of Fig. 2-18-B.

In case of the Cassette Guide Post installation, install correctly as the circled section of Fig. 2-18-C.

“A” “B”

P4 Cap

Fig. 2-17-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Clutch Ass’y installation, install it with inserting the spring of the Clutch Ass’y into the dent of the

Coupling Gear. (Refer to Fig. 2-17-B)

Clutch Ass’y

[OK]

Cassette Guide Post

[NG]

Cassette Guide Post

Cassette Opener

Fig. 2-18-B

Coupling Gear

Fig. 2-17-B

B2-6

Fig. 2-18-C

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

3. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS

NOTE

1. Do not disassemble the DVD DECK PARTS except listed parts here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassemble is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace the DVD MECHA ASS’Y.

3-1: TRAY (Refer to Fig. 3-1-A)

Set the Tray opened. (Refer to the DISC REMOVAL

METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY)

Unlock the support 1 and remove the Tray.

Rack Loading

Move it to the direction of the arrow.

2 3

Main Chassis Ass’y

Check Lock

Main Frame Ass’y

Tray Fig. 3-2-B

Main Frame Ass’y

Fig. 3-1-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Tray installation, install them as the circled section of Fig. 3-1-B so that the each markers are met.

3-3: RACK LOADING/MAIN GEAR/ RACK LOADING

SPRING/ RACK L SPRING (Refer to Fig. 3-3)

Remove the Rack L Spring.

Press down the catcher 1 and slide the Rack Loading.

Remove the Rack Loading, Rack Loading Spring and

Main Gear.

Tray

Rack Loading

Main Gear

Rack Loading Spring

Rack L Spring

Main Frame Ass’y Fig. 3-1-B

3-2: MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 3-2-A)

Remove the Main Chassis Ass’y from the Insulator (R).

Unlock the support 1 .

Remove the Main Chassis Ass’y.

Insulator (R)

(Green)

Main Frame Ass’y

Fig. 3-3

3-4: CLAMPER ASS’Y/INSULATOR(R)/LEVER SWITCH

(Refer to Fig. 3-4-A)

Remove the screw 1 .

Remove the Lever Switch.

Remove the 2 Insulator (R).

Press the Clamper and rotate the Clamper Plate clockwise, then unlock the 3 supports 2 .

Remove the Clamper Plate, Clamper Magnet and Clamper.

Clamper Plate

Clamper Magnet

Insulator (R)

(Green)

Insulator (R)

(Green)

Main Chassis Ass’y

Fig. 3-2-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Main Chassis Ass’y, install it from (1) to (6) in order. (Refer to Fig. 3-2-B)

B3-1

Lever Switch

2 2

Clamper

Main Frame

Fig. 3-4-A

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE

When installing the Clamper Magnet, install it with the green face up.

When installing the wire of the Lever Switch, install it correctly as Fig. 3-4-B.

When installing the Lever Switch, install it correctly as

Fig. 3-4-C.

In case of the Lever Switch installation, hook the wire on the Main Frame as shown Fig. 3-4-D.

Main Chassis Ass'y

Lever Switch

Traverse Holder

3-6: SWITCH PCB ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 3-6-A)

Remove the screw 1 .

Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.

Switch PCB Ass'y

Fig. 3-5-B

Red

Blue

White From DVD PCB

Fig. 3-4-B

The Lever should be position between A and B.

Rack Loading A B

Fig. 3-4-C

Main Chassis Ass'y

• Screw Torque: 4

0.5kgf•cm Fig. 3-6-A

NOTE

When installing the wire of the Switch PCB, install it correctly as Fig. 3-6-B.

Switch PCB Ass'y

Black

White

From Relay PCB

Lever Switch

3-5: TRAVERSE HOLDER/INSULATOR (F)

(Refer to Fig. 3-5-A)

Remove the Traverse Holder.

Remove the 2 Insulator (F).

Fig. 3-4-D

Main Chassis Ass'y

Fig. 3-6-B

3-7: RACK FEED ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 3-7-A)

Remove the screw 1 .

Remove the Rack Feed 1 Spring, Rack Feed 1/2 and

Rack Feed Lever.

Rack Feed 2

Main Chassis Ass’y

Insulator (F)

(Black)

Traverse Holder

Rack Feed 1 Spring

Rack Feed Lever

Rack Feed 1

Main Chassis Ass'y

Insulator (F)

(Black)

Fig. 3-5-A

NOTE

1. After the installing of the Traverse Holder, check if the wire is like Fig. 3-5-B.

B3-2

• Screw Torque: 3.5

0.5kgf•cm Fig. 3-7-A

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE

After the assembly of the Rack Feed, check if the Rack

Feed 1/2 is moving smoothly. (Refer to Fig. 3-7-B)

In case of the Rack Feed Ass’y installation, install correctly as Fig. 3-7-C.

3-9: GEAR (Refer to Fig. 3-9-A)

Unlock the support 1 .

Remove the Middle Gear 1/2/3, Idler Gear and Feed Gear.

Middle Gear 2

Middle Gear 1

Moving smoothly

Middle Gear 3

Idler Gear

Feed Gear

Moving smoothly Fig. 3-7-B

Should not be engaged.

Check the position of the Rack Feed Lever.

Fig. 3-7-C

3-8: RELAY PCB ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 3-8-A)

Remove the screw 1 .

Remove the Relay PCB Ass’y.

Main Chassis Ass’y

Fig. 3-9-A

NOTE

In case of the Idler Gear installation, install correctly as

Fig. 3-9-B.

When installing the Middle Gear 2, check if the Middle

Gear 2 is locked correctly as Fig. 3-9-C.

[OK]

Idler Gear

[NG]

Idler Gear

Idler Arm

Check Lock

Idler Arm Fig. 3-9-B

Relay PCB Ass’y

• Screw Torque: 4 ± 0.5kgf•cm

Fig. 3-8-A

NOTE

1. When installing the wire of the Relay PCB, install it correctly as Fig. 3-8-B.

Fig. 3-9-C

Middle Gear 2

3-10: IDLER ARM (Refer to Fig. 3-10)

Remove the Idler Arm.

Idler Arm

Main Chassis Ass'y

Fig. 3-10

Fig. 3-8-B

B3-3

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

3-11: FEED MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 3-11-A)

Remove the 2 screws 1 .

Remove the Feed Motor.

Remove the Motor Gear.

1 1

Main Chassis Ass'y

Motor Gear

Feed Motor

• Screw Torque: 1

0.5kgf•cm

Fig. 3-11-A

NOTE

In case of the Motor Gear installation, check if the value of the Fig. 3-11-B is correct.

When installing the Feed Motor, check if the cable is positioned as Fig. 3-11-C.

Motor Gear

Feed Motor

Safety surface for pressing of the insert.

Main Chassis Ass'y

6.1

0.1mm

Fig. 3-11-B

Pass the cable between 2 pins.

Feed Motor

Fig. 3-11-C

B3-4

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT

PACKAGE IC

REMOVAL

1. Put the Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat

Package IC to protect other parts from any damage.

(Refer to Fig. 4-1.)

NOTE

Masking is carried out on all the parts located within

10 mm distance from IC leads.

3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using a tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-3.)

NOTE

Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.

Blower type IC desoldering machine

Masking Tape

(Cotton Tape)

Tweezers

Fig. 4-1

2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-2.)

NOTE

Do not add the rotating and the back and forth directions force on the IC, until IC can move back and forth easily after desoldering the IC leads completely.

Blower type IC desoldering machine

Fig. 4-3

Peel off the Masking Tape.

Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-4.)

NOTE

Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical direction towards the IC pattern.

Fig. 4-2

Braided Shield Wire

Soldering Iron

IC pattern

Fig. 4-4

B4-1

INSTALLATION

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thintip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 4-8.) 1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.

(Refer to Fig. 4-5.)

Thin-tip Soldering Iron

Soldering Iron

Solder temporarily Solder temporarily

Fig. 4-5

2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.

(Refer to Fig. 4-6.)

Fig. 4-8

5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the

IC using a magnifying glass.

Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering position and installation position of the parts around the

IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.

NOTE

When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this case.

Soldering Iron

Solder

IC Supply soldering from upper position to lower position

Fig. 4-6

3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-7.)

NOTE

Do not absorb the solder to excess.

Soldering Iron

Braided Shield Wire

Fig. 4-7

B4-2

A/C

ACC

AFC

AFT

AFT DET

AGC

AMP

ANT

A.PB

APC

ASS'Y

AUTO

A/V

BGP

BOT

BPF

BRAKE SOL

BUFF

B/W

CASE

CAP

CARR

CLK

CLOCK (SY-SE)

COMB

CONV

CPM

CTL

CYL

CYL-M

CYL SENS

DATA (SY-CE) dB

EOT

EXT

FBC

FL SW

DD Unit

DEMOD

DET

DEV

EMPH

ENC

ENV

FSC

FWD

GEN

GND

Audio/Control

Automatic Color Control

Audio Erase

Automatic Frequency Control

Automatic Fine Tuning

Automatic Fine Tuning Detect

Automatic Gain Control

Amplifier

Antenna

Audio Playback

Automatic Phase Control

Assembly

All Time

Automatic

Audio/Video

Burst Gate Pulse

Beginning of Tape

Bandpass Filter

Brake Solenoid

Buffer

Black and White

Capacitance, Collector

Cassette

Capstan

Carrier

Channel

Clock

Clock (Syscon to Servo)

Combination, Comb Filter

Converter

Capstan Motor

Control

Cylinder

Cylinder-Motor

Cylinder-Sensor

Data (Syscon to Servo)

Decibel

Direct Current

Direct Drive Motor Unit

Demodulator

Detector

Deviation

Emitter

Emitter Follower

Emphasis

Encoder

Envelope

End of Tape

Equalizer

External

Fuse

Feed Back Clamp

Full Erase

Fast Forward, Flip-flop

Frequency Generator

Front Loading Switch

Frequency Modulation

Frequency Sub Carrier

Forward

Generator

Ground

KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS

MINI

MIX

MOD

MPX

MS SW

OSC

OPE

PB CTL

PB-C

PB-Y

PCB

P. CON

P-P

H.P.F

H.SW

IND

INV

KIL

LED

LIMIT AMP

LM, LDM

L.P.F

LUMI.

MAX

REC

REC-C

REC-Y

REEL BRK

REEL S

REF

REG

REW

REV, RVS

RMC

S. CLK

S. COM

S. DATA

SEG

SEL

SENS

SER

SIF

SOL

C1-1

High Pass Filter

Head Switch

Hertz

Integrated Circuit

Intermediate Frequency

Indicator

Inverter

Killer

Left

Light Emitting Diode

Limiter Amplifier

Loading Motor

Long Play

Low Pass Filter

Luminance

Motor

Maximum

Minimum

Mixer, mixing

Monostable Multivibrator

Modulator, Modulation

Multiplexer, Multiplex

Mecha State Switch

Non Connection

Noise Reduction

Oscillator

Operation

Playback

Playback Control

Playback-Chrominance

Playback-Luminance

Printed Circuit Board

Power Control

Phase Detector

Pulse Generator

Peak-to Peak

Right

Recording

Recording-Chrominance

Recording-Luminance

Reel Brake

Reel Sensor

Reference

Regulated, Regulator

Rewind

Reverse

Radio Frequency

Remote Control

Relay

Serial Clock

Sensor Common

Serial Data

Segment

Select, Selector

Sensor

Search Mode

Serial Input

Sound Intermediate Frequency

Serial Output

Solenoid

Standard Play

STB

SYNC

SYNC SEP

TRAC

TRICK PB

UNREG

VCO

VIF

V.PB

V.REC

VSF

VSR

VSS

V-SYNC

X'TAL

Y/C

KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS

Serial Strobe

Switch

Synchronization

Sync Separator, Separation

Transistor

Tracking

Trick Playback

Test Point

Unregulated

Volt

Voltage Controlled Oscillator

Video Intermediate Frequency

Vertical Pulse, Voltage Display

Video Playback

Variable Resistor

Video Recording

Visual Search Fast Forward

Visual Search Rewind

Voltage Super Source

Vertical-Synchronization

Voltage Tuning

Crystal

Luminance/Chrominance

C1-2

SERVICE MODE LIST

This unit provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.

To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit or on the main unit and on the remote control for more than a standard time (second).

Set Key Set Key

Standard Time

(seconds)

Operations

PLAY/REC total hours are displayed on the screen.

Refer to the “PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS”

(CONFIRMATION OF HOURS USED).

CH UP FF 2

CH UP STOP 2

Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.

Refer to the “WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC”.

Adjust the PG SHIFTER automatically.

Refer to the “ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT” (PG SHIFTER).

CH UP

CH DOWN

PLAY

POWER

Initialization of the factory on VCR.

NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.

If you set a factory initialization, the memories are reset such as the clock setting, the channel setting, and PLAY/REC total hours.

VCR operation mode at no connection of DVD.

Refer to the “PREPARATION FOR SERVICING”

NOTE: Although the DVD is connected, the DVD mode cannot be selected.

Set Key

REC

STOP

Remocon Key

Standard Time

(seconds)

CM SKIP

Operations

Initialization of the factory on DVD.

NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.

The function will only work without the setting of DVD disc at DVD mode.

While pressing the Remocon Key for more than the Standard Time, press the Set Key simultaneously.

DVD Write mode.

Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”.

NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.

The function will only work at the DVD stop mode.

Check for the firmware version.

Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”.

NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.

The function will only work at the DVD stop mode.

Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.

Refer to the “PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL”.

NOTE: The function will only work without the setting of DVD disc at

DVD mode.

Tray cannot be opened.

Refer to the “TRAY LOCK”.

NOTE: No indications on the screen when the Tray Lock is setting.

Method

Press the ATR button on the remote control for more than

2 seconds during PLAY.

Make the short circuit between the test point of

SERVICE and the GND.

Operations

Adjusting of the Tracking to the center position.

Refer to the “MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT” (GUIDE ROLLER) and “ELECTRICAL

ADJUSTMENT” (PG SHIFTER).

The BOT, EOT, and the Reel Sensor do not work and the VCR deck can be operated without a cassette tape.

Refer to the “PREPARATION FOR SERVICING”

C2-1

PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS

The following standard table depends on environmental conditions and usage.

Parts replacing time does not mean the life span for individual parts.

Also, long term storage or misuse may cause transformation and aging of rubber parts.

The following list means standard hours, so the checking hours depends on the conditions.

Time

Parts Name

Audio Control Head

Full Erase Head

(Recorder only)

Capstan Belt

Pinch Roller

Capstan DD Unit

Loading Motor

Tension Band

T Brake Band

Clutch Ass’y

Idler Arm Ass’y

Capstan Shaft

Tape Running

Guide Post

Cylinder Unit

500 hours

1,000 hours

1,500 hours

2,000 hours

2,500 hours

Notes

Clean those parts in contact with the tape.

Clean the rubber, and parts which the rubber touches.

: Clean

: Check it and if necessary, replace it.

CONFIRMATION OF HOURS USED

PLAY/REC total hours can be checked on the screen.

Total hours are displayed in 16 system of notation.

NOTE: If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to “0”.

Connect the set to TV Monitor.

Turn on the POWER.

Press both CH UP button on the set and the FF button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

The Fig. 1 screen will appear on TV Monitor.

After the confirmation of using hours, turn off the power.

Replace when rolling becomes abnormal.

Clean the Head

INIT 00 0E

PLAY/REC 0010

Fig. 1

Initial setting content of MEMORY IC.

PLAY/REC total hours.

= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value)

+ (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value)

+ (16 x tens digit value)

+ (ones digit value)

C3-1

PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS

CLEANING

NOTE

After cleaning the heads with isopropyl alcohol, do not run a tape until the heads dry completely. If the heads are not completely dry and alcohol gets on the tape, damage may occur.

1. AUDIO CONTROL HEAD

Clean the Audio Control Head with the cotton stick soaked by alcohol. Clean the full erase head in the same manner. (Refer to the figure below.)

2. TAPE RUNNING SYSTEM

When cleaning the tape transport system, use the gauze moistened with isopropyl alcohol.

3. CYLINDER

Wrap a piece of chamois around your finger. Dip it in isopropyl alcohol. Hold it to the cylinder head softly.

Turn the cylinder head counterclockwise to clean it (in the direction of the arrow). (Refer to the figure below.)

NOTE

Do not exert force against the cylinder head. Do not move the chamois upward or downward on the head.

Use the chamois one by one.

Audio Control Head

Cylinder Head

C3-2

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Confirm that the “No Disc” will be appeared on the screen.

Open the DVD tray.

Press both Channel button (6) on the remote control and the REC button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

Press OPEN/CLOSE button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.

NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.

When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.

Place the Up-Date Disc and close the tray by hand. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)

Automatic read will start and "CD-R UPDATE PROCESS" will be displayed on the screen.

At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.

Approxi. 20 seconds later, the tray will open automatically. Remove the Up-Date Disc.

Then, Approxi. 40 seconds later, the above indication will disappear and the tray will close automatically.

When the "No Disc" appears on the screen, the write will end.

NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or push the tray by hand to close it.

Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.

10.

Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.

11.

After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.

Set to the DVD mode, press both Channel button (4) on the remote control and the REC button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

12.

The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.

Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.

13.

CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION

Set to the DVD mode, press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than

3 seconds.

Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.

No Disc

GLB4114B G L B 4 1 1 4 B

14.

Fixed Released times on the same date

Release date (Example: 2001.1.14)

When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.

Turn off the power

A = October

B = November

C = December

C4-1

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC

If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken to ensure correct data settings while making reference to TABLE 1.

NOTE: INI 34 and INI 35 cannot be set. Because, the total time for the PLAY/REC of the main unit is recorded.

INIT +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F

00 0E 52 DE 60 64 64 4A 86 0B 2B 86 32 8A 08 0A 0F

10 AF 97 95 8A B0 55 31 04 88 A5 9F 3A 00 10 BF 00

20 3A 11 22 70 61 2A 3A 00 0B 00 00 E5 A2 B0 00 ---

Table 1

Connect the set to TV Monitor.

Turn on the POWER.

Press both CH UP button on the set and the FF button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

ADDRESS and DATA will appear on TV Monitor as Fig 1.

ADDRESS DATA

INIT 00 0E

PLAY/REC 0010

Fig. 1

ADDRESS is now selected and should “blink”. Using the SET + or - button on the remote, step through the ADDRESS until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached.

Press ENTER to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will “blink”.

Again, step through the DATA using SET + or - button until required DATA value has been selected.

Pressing ENTER will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.

Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all data has been checked.

When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.

After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

10.

Turn POWER on.

11.

Press both CH UP button on the set and the PLAY button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

12.

After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.

The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.

C4-2

RF SIGNAL CHECK OF DVD PCB

RF signal check can be done at the following A~D resistance points on the DVD PCB.

DVD PCB (BOTTOM SIDE)

W806

B4007

C4095

C2626

C2627

C2609

C4-3

Alignment Tape

ST-N5

ST-NF

VTR cleaning kit

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS

Back tension cassette gauge Torque cassette gauge

(KT-300NR)

Taper nut driver

70909103

VTR lubrication kit

70909199

Grease

70909228

JG002B

JG002E

Adapter

Dial Torque Gauge

(10~90gf•cm)

JG002F (60~600gf•cm)

JG022 Master Plane JG024A Reel Disk Height

Adjustment Jig

JG153 X Value Adjustment

Screwdriver

JG154 Cable

JG176 Up-Date Disc JG185 Tentelometer

Ref. No.

JG002B

JG002E

JG002F

JG022

JG024A

JG153

JG154

JG176

JG185

Part No.

APJG002B00

APJG002E00

APJG002F00

APJG022000

APJG024A00

APJG153000

APJG154000

APJG176043

APJG185000

Parts Name

Adapter

Dial Torque Gauge (10~90gf•cm)

Dial Torque Gauge (60~600gf•cm)

Master Plane

Reel Disk Height Adjustment Jig

X Value Adjustment Screwdriver

Cable

Up-Date Disc

Tentelometer

Remarks

VSR Torque, Brake Torque (S Reel/T Reel Ass'y)

Brake Torque (T Reel Ass'y)

VSR Torque, Brake Torque (S Reel)

Reel Disk Height Adjustment

X Value Adjustment

Used to connect the test point of SERVICE and GROUND

Up-Date of the Firmware

Confirmation of Tape Tension on Playback

PREPARATION FOR SERVICING

How to use the Servicing Fixture

While pressing the POWER button on the set for more than 2 seconds, press the CH DOWN button on the set simultaneously at the Power OFF. Although the DVD is connected, the DVD mode cannot be selected.

Short circuit between TP3001 and Ground with the cable JG154.

(The BOT, EOT, and the Reel Sensor do not work and the VCR deck can be operated without a cassette tape.)

In case of using a cassette tape, press the STOP/EJECT button to insert or eject a cassette tape.

Turn on the power and re-check the cable before checking the trouble points.

When you servicing with connection of DVD, perform the operations above step 2 to step 3.

D1-1

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

1. CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT

Read the following NOTES before starting work.

• Place an object which weighs between 450g~500g on the

Cassette Tape to keep it steady when you want to make the tape run without the Cassette Holder. (Do not place an object which weighs over 500g.)

1-1: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF REEL DISK

HEIGHT

Turn on the power and set to the STOP mode.

Set the master plane (JG022) and reel disk height adjustment jig (JG024A) on the mechanism framework, taking care not to scratch the drum, as shown in Fig. 1-1-

While turning the reel and confirm the following points.

Check if the surface "A" of reel disk is lower than the surface "B" of reel disk height adjustment jig (JG024A) and is higher than the surface "C". If it is not passed, place the height adjustment washers and adjust to 10(+2,

-0)mm.

Adjust the other reel in the same way.

1-2: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF TENSION

POST POSITION

Set to the PLAY mode.

Adjust the adjusting section for the Tension Arm position so that the Tension Arm top is within the standard line of

Main Chassis.

While turning the S Reel clockwise, confirm that the edge of the Tension Arm is located in the position described above.

Standard line of Main Chassis

Tension Arm

0.5mm (Adjusting range)

Adjusting section for the

Tension Arm position

Fig. 1-2-A

Master Plane (JG022)

Tension Band

Reel Disk Height Adjustment Jig

(JG024A)

Fig. 1-1-A

Master Plane (JG022)

Reel Disk

Reel Disk Height

Adjustment Jig

(JG024A)

(B)

10(+0.2, -0)mm

Height Adjustment

Washer

2.6x4.7xT0.13

2.6X4.7xT0.25

(A)

(C)

The Tension Arm top will move to the inside direction of the Main Chassis.

Bend

The Tension Arm top will move to the outside direction of the Main Chassis.

Fig. 1-2-B

1-3: CONFIRMATION OF PLAYBACK TORQUE AND

BACK TENSION TORQUE DURING PLAYBACK

Load a video tape (T-120) recorded in standard speed mode.

Set the unit to the PLAY mode.

Install the tentelometer (JG185) as shown in Fig. 1-3. Confirm that the meter indicates 20

2gf in the beginning of playback.

• USING A CASSETTE TYPE TORQUE TAPE (KT-300NR)

After confirmation and adjustment of Tension Post position (Refer to item 1-2), load the cassette type torque tape (KT-300NR) and set to the PLAY mode.

Confirm that the right meter of the torque tape indicates

50~90gf•cm during playback in SP mode.

Confirm that the left meter of the torque tape indicates

25~40gf•cm during playback in SP mode.

Tentelometer

(JG185)

Video Tape

Fig. 1-1-B

P1 Post

Guide Roller

Fig. 1-3

D2-1

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

1-4: CONFIRMATION OF VSR TORQUE

Install the Torque Gauge (JG002F) and Adapter (JG002B) on the S Reel. Set to the Picture Search (Rewind) mode.

(Refer to Fig.1-4-B)

Then, confirm that it indicates 120~180gf•cm.

NOTE

Install the Torque Gauge on the reel disk firmly. Press the

REW button to turn the reel disk.

NOTE

If the torque is out of the range, replace the following parts.

Check item

1-4

1-5

Replacement Part

Idler Ass'y/Clutch Ass'y

S Reel side: S Reel/Tension Band/Tension

T Reel side:

Connect/Tension Arm Ass'y

T Reel/T Brake Band//T Brake

Spring/T Brake Arm

1-5: CONFIRMATION OF REEL BRAKE TORQUE

(S Reel Brake) (Refer to Fig. 1-4-B)

Once set to the Fast Forward mode then set to the Stop mode. While, unplug the AC cord when the Pinch Roller

Block is on the position of Fig. 1-4-A.

Move the Idler Ass'y from the S Reel.

Install the Torque Gauge (JG002F) and Adapter

(JG002B) on the S Reel. Turn the Torque Gauge

(JG002F) clockwise.

Then, confirm that it indicates 60~100gf•cm.

(T Reel Brake) (Refer to Fig. 1-4-B)

Once set to the Fast Forward mode then set to the Stop mode. While, unplug the AC cord when the Pinch Roller

Block is on the position of Fig. 1-4-A.

Move the Idler Ass'y from the T Reel.

Install the Torque Gauge (JG002E) and Adapter

(JG002B) on the T reel. Turn the Torque Gauge

(JG002E) counterclockwise.

Then, confirm that it indicates 30~50gf•cm.

The position at

STOP mode.

Capstan DD Unit

The position at FF mode.

Stop at this position.

Pinch Roller Block

Cassette

Opener

2. CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF

TAPE RUNNING MECHANISM

Tape Running Mechanism is adjusted precisely at the factory. Adjustment is not necessary as usual. When you replace the parts of the tape running mechanism because of long term usage or failure, the confirmation and adjustment are necessary.

2-1: GUIDE ROLLER

Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5

MODE2).

Connect CH-1 of the oscilloscope to TP101 (Envelope) and CH-2 to TP3002 (SW Pulse).

Trigger with SW Pulse and observe the envelope. (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A)

When observing the envelope, adjust the Taper Nut Driver slightly until the envelope will be flat.

Even if you press the Tracking Button, adjust so that flatness is not moved so much.

Adjust so that the A : B ratio is better than 3 : 2 as shown in Fig. 2-1-B, even if you press the Tracking Button to move the envelope (The envelope waveform will begin to decrease when you press the Tracking Button).

Adjust the PG shifter during playback.

(Refer to the ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS)

NOTE

After adjustment, confirm and adjust A/C head.

(Refer to item 2-2)

Cassette Holder Ass'y

Fig. 1-4-A

CH-1

Envelope

(TP101)

Torque Gauge/Adapter

(JG002F/JG002B)

CH-2

SW Pulse (TP3002)

CH-1

Track

CH-2

Track

Torque Gauge/Adapter

(JG002E/JG002B)

Fig. 2-1-A

Entrance Exit

S Reel

Max A

Max

T Reel

Fig. 1-4-B

A : B ≥ 3 : 2

Fig. 2-1-B

D2-2

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-2: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF AUDIO/

CONTROL HEAD

When the Tape Running Mechanism does not work well, adjust the following items.

Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5

MODE2).

Confirm that the reflected picture of stamp mark is appeared on the tape prior to P4 Cap as shown in Fig. 2-

2-A.

a) When the reflected picture is distorted, turn the screw

1 clockwise until the distortion is disappeared.

b) When the reflected picture is not distorted, turn the screw 1 counterclockwise until little distortion is

appeared, then adjust the a).

Turn the screw 2 to set the audio level to maximum.

Confirm that the bottom of the Audio/ Control Head and the bottom of the tape is shown in Fig. 2-2-C.

c) When the height is not correct, turn the screw 3 to adjust the height. Then, adjust the 1~3 again.

2-3: TAPE RUNNING ADJUSTMENT

(X VALUE ADJUSTMENT)

Confirm and adjust the height of the Reel Disk.

(Refer to item 1-1)

Confirm and adjust the position of the Tension Post.

(Refer to item 1-2)

Adjust the Guide Roller. (Refer to item 2-1)

Confirm and adjust the Audio/Control Head.

(Refer to item 2-2)

Connect CH-1 of the oscilloscope to TP3002 and CH-2 to

TP101.

Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5

MODE2).

Press and hold the ATR button on the remote control

more than 2 seconds to set tracking to center.

Set the X Value adjustment driver (JG153) to the 4 of

Fig. 2-2-B. Adjust X value so that the envelope waveform output becomes maximum. Then, check if the 5 section of Fig. 2-2-B is on the center position (or rather to the cylinder side). In case of the envelope maximum at the difference position from the center, adjust the matching of picture and sound again.

Audio/Control Head

Reflected picture of

Stamp Mark

P4 Cap

Stamp Mark

Audio/Control Head

Fig. 2-2-A

[OK] [NG]

Fig. 2-2-B

Audio/Control Head

Tape

0.25

0.05mm

Fig. 2-2-C

D2-3

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS

3. MECHANISM ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE

10 9 8

1. Tension Connect

2. Tension Arm

3. Guide Roller

4. Audio/Control Head

5. X value adjustment driver hole

P4 Post

T Brake Spring

T Reel

S Reel

10.

Adjusting section for the Tension Arm position

D2-4

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

Read and perform this adjustment when repairing the circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.

1. BASIC ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION

When you exchange IC and Transistor for a heat sink, apply the silicon grease on the contact section of the heat sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to the

IC and Transistor.)

1-1: PG SHIFTER

CONDITIONS

MODE-PLAYBACK

Input Signal-Alignment Tape

INSTRUCTIONS

Connect CH-1 on the oscilloscope to TP3002 and CH-2 to TP8001.

Playback the alignment tape.

Press and hold the ATR button on the remote control more than 2 seconds to set tracking to center.

Press both CH UP button on the set and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

CH-2

6.5H

CH-1

Fig. 1-1-A

CH-2

CH-1

Fig. 1-1-B

D3-1

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

AC IN

CD501

J8002 J8001

VCR PCB

TP8001

CP102

TP3001

S501

S502

CP8002 CD8002 CP8102

CP103

FE HEAD

AC HEAD

TP101

TP3002

CP652

CP501 CP4002

CP2601

CP2603

CP2602

CP651

DVD PCB

V651

CD2001

DVD DECK

OPERATION 2 PCB

CP681

CD681

FRONT JACK PCB

CP601

CP602

CP603

OPERATION 1 PCB

OS601

D3-2

(VCR SECTION)

POWER DOES NOT TURN ON

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Does display light?

YES

NO Is the voltage linked to L506?

YES

Check of V651 and peripheral circuit.

Is the voltage at pin 30 of IC 3001

0V?

YES

Check of T501 and peripheral circuit.

Check IC3001.

Check of T501 and peripheral circuit.

E-1

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE POWER SUPPLY CUT

Inserting a casette and push play button.

Does the power cut after 3 seconds?

YES

Does the power cut after about 6 seconds?

Check the POWER BLOCK.

YES

Check CAPSTAN DD UNIT and CYLINDER UNIT.

Check Q3006,Q3008 and CAPSTAN BELT.

E-2

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

AT PLAYBACK AND RECORDING,

CYLINDER MOTOR UNLOAD

Is the voltage at pin 8 of

CP3001 about DC12.6V?

YES

In playback,is at pin 12 of

CP3001 about DC2.6V?

YES

Change CYLINDER MOTOR.

Check 12.6 V line and

POWER BLOCK.

Check IC3001.

E-3

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

AUDIO SHAKES

Is AUDIO HEAD scratched?

At playback,is input about

4.5Vp-p of a rectangular wave at pin 9 of IC3001?

YES

NO At playback,is pin 5 of

CP3001 3.5V?

YES

Check AUDIO BLOCK.

Change AUDIO HEAD.

Change CAPSTAN DD UNIT.

Check IC3001.

E-4

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The CASSETTE TAPE

CAN NOT BE INSERTED

Does WORM GEAR of cassette loading block move?

YES

When a CASSETTE can not inserted, is pin 25 of

IC3001 5V ?

YES

When a CASSETTE is inserted, is pin 8 of

CP3001 12.6V ?

Check circuit of POWER BLOCK.

YES

Check WORM GEAR of cassette loading block.

Check LED of DECK,

PHOTO SENSOR.

Change

LOADING MOTOR.

E-5

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

WHEN INSERTING A CASSETTE,

IT EJECTS IMMEDIATELY

Does another CASSETTE insert?

YES

Does SW3001 and

REC LEVER correctly set ?

YES

After inserting

CASSETTE, is pin 35 of IC3001 0V ?

YES

Check IC3001.

Defective CASSETTE or cassette loading block.

Correctly SW3001 and REC LEVER set.

Check SW3001.

E-6

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

CAN NOT FF/REW

At FF/REW, does voltage at pin98 of IC3001 change?

YES

Check DECK MECHANISM.

Check of IC3001.

E-7

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

TAPE LOADING IS OK, BUT

UNLOADS IMMEDIATELY

Does CYLINDER rotate?

YES

Is there HEAD SW

PULSE at TP3002.

YES

Is the voltage at pin 2 of CP3001

12.6V ?

YES

At play, is the voltage at pin 12 of CP3001 2.6V ?

YES

Change CYLINDER unit.

Is PG PULSE signal inputted to pin 104 of IC3001 ?

YES

Check POWER BLOCK.

Change IC3001.

Check Q3006 and Q3008.

E-8

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

AT PLAY, THE PICTURE

JITTERS VERTICAL MINUTELY

Is FG wave of CP3001 at pin 11 5V ?

YES

Is pin 12 of CP3001 2.6V ?

YES

Change CYLINDER MOTOR.

Change

CYLINDER MOTOR.

Change IC3001.

E-9

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

AUTO TRACKING

DOES NOT OPERATE

In auto tracking, is the voltage at pin 24 of IC3001 more than DC 0.2V?

YES

Does the CTL pulse signal (about 2.5Vp-p) appear at pin 7 of IC3001.

2.5Vp-p

YES

Check CONTROL HEAD.

Change IC3001.

E-10

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

WHEN PLAYBACK, FF OR REW

MODE IS ACTIVE, UNIT STOPS

IMMEDIATELY

Does CAPSTAN DD

MOTOR rotate?

YES

Is there REEL SENSOR

PULSE signal at pin 38 and pin 39 of IC3001.

YES

Change IC3001.

Refer to section "CAPSTAN

DD MOTOR NOT

ROTAING".

Check Q3001 and Q3002.

E-11

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

AT PLAY, PICTURE JITTERS

HORIZONTALLY

NO Does a noise on the picture appear?

YES

By adjusting the MANUAL

TRACKING UP/DOWN

BUTTONS, will the line disappear?

YES

Is a height of GUIDE POST maximum?

YES

Is PG SHIFTER adjustment 6.5H?

YES

Is a wave of PB-Y unusual?

YES

Change IC101.

Check P/B ENVELOPE.

The height of GUIDE POST readjust.

Adjust PG SHIFTER.

Change IC101 and peripheral circuit.

E-12

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

AT PLAYBACK, THE PICTUER

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does E-E picture appear?

YES

NO Is the voltage of IC101 at pin 44, 45, 52 and 68 5V?

YES

Check POWER BLOCK.

Is there video signal of IC101 at pin 26?

YES

Change IC101.

Is there video signal of IC8005 at pin 2?

YES

Is there video signal of IC3001 at pin 19?

YES

Check J8001.

Change IC8005.

Change IC3001.

E-13

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

AT PLAYBACK, THE COLER DOES

NOT APPEAR

Is there color signal in video signal at pin 26 of

IC101.

YES

Is there video signal at pin

26 of IC101.

YES

Change IC101.

Change X'tal.

E-14

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

PLAYBACK PICTURE IS NOISY

(EVEN AFTER CLEANING HEADS)

Is noisy a wave of video signal at pin 26 of IC101?

YES

Is noisy a wave of video signal of EMITTER of Q8004

YES

Check J8001.

Check CYLINDER.

Check Q8004.

E-15

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NO COLOR DURING SELF

RECORDING AND PLAYBACK

Is there CHROMA signal at pin 30, 32 of IC101.

YES

Is there CHROMA signal at pin 26 of IC101.

YES

Check circuit around of J8001.

Check J601, IC8002 and circuit around it.

Change IC101.

E-16

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

AT PLAY, AUDIO DOES NOT

APPEAR

At E-E, does audio appear?

YES

Is the voltage at pin 6 of

IC101 about 2.5V?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin

10 of IC101?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin

22, 24 of IC701?

Check whether there are not a damage, dirt in AUDIO HEAD.

YES

Refer to section"E-E DOES

NOT APPEAR".

Check A/C HEAD.

Check circuit around at pin

10 of IC101.

Check circuit around at pin

22, 24 of IC701.

E-17

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

CAPSTAN DD MOTOR NOT

ROTATING

In playback,is there voltage at pin 2 of CP3001 12V?

YES

In playback,is there voltage at pin 102 of IC3001 2.5V?

YES

DD MOTOR rotate now?

If not, replace it.

Check POWER BLOCK.

Change IC3001.

E-18

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE AUDIO CAN NOT

RECORD

Is bias level at L101 OK?

YES

In startinAg recording, is there sine wave at pin 11 of IC101?

YES

Check disconnection and short of L101.

NO Check POWER BLOCK and voltage of base of Q103.

Is there audio signal at pin 76, 78 and 80 of IC101?

YES

Is there voltage of base of Q103 about 5V?

YES

Is there a sine wave at pin 5 of L101?

YES

Check lead wire of A/C HEAD and CONNECTOR.

Check IC701 and the circuit from TUNER or audio input jack to IC701 .

Change Q103.

Change L101.

E-19

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE CASSETTE INSERT, BUT

THE TAPE DOES NOT MOVE

Does the mode appear at display?

YES

Does operate with

remote control?

YES

Check operation PCB.

Check LOADING MOTOR and

MODE SENSOR

RELATION DEPARTMENT.

Check IC3001.

E-20

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

RECORDING MECHANISM WORKS,

BUT NO VIDEO RECORD FROM

INPUT JACK OR TUNER

Is there video signal at pin 30, 32 of IC 101?

YES

Is the BASE of

Q103 5V?

YES

Is the voltage at pin 96 of IC3001 5V?

YES

Check cricuit of video signal from

VIDEO IN or

TUNER to IC101.

Change IC3001.

Is there video signal at pin 26 of IC101?

YES

Check CYLINDER UNIT and circuit around of CP101.

Change IC101.

E-21

E-E DOES NOT APPEAR

(THE PICTURE DOES NOT

APPEAR FROM TUNER)

Does normality AUDIO JACK

CONNECT?

YES

Are there thevoltage of +B(5V),TU(32V) of TU301?

YES

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Connection is done over again.

Check POWER BLOCK.

Check the picture.

Is there video signal at pin 17 of TU301?

YES

Is there video signal at pin 26 of IC101?

YES

Is there video signal at pin 19 of IC3001?

YES

Check J8001.

Change TU301.

Change IC101.

Change IC3001.

E-22

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-E AUDIO (MONO)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) appear?

YES

Is the voltage at pin 77 of IC101 5V?

YES

Is the voltage at pin 95 of IC3001 5V?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin 10, 15 of IC701?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin 61 of IC701?

YES

Check circuit around of J8001.

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Check POWER BLOCK.

Change IC3001.

Check J602, J603.

Change IC701.

E-23

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

E-E AUDIO (STEREO)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Is the voltage at pin

25,40,51 of IC701 5V?

YES

Is the voltage at pin

58 of IC701 12V?

YES

Is there Audio signal at pin 10, 15 of IC701?

YES

Is there Audio signal at pin 53, 57 of IC701.

YES

Check circuit around of J8001.

Check POWER BLOCK.

Check J602, J603.

Change IC701.

E-24

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

TUNER AUDIO (MONO)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does E-E AUDIO

(MONO) appear?

YES

Is there signal at pin

48 of IC701?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin 53, 57 of IC701?

YES

Is there audio signal a collector of Q8005 and Q8006?

YES

Check circuit around of J8001.

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Check circuit around of TU301 at pin 14.

Change IC701.

Check IC701.

E-25

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

TUNER AUDIO (STEREO)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does TUNER AUDIO

(MONO) appear?

YES

Does E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) appear?

YES

At the time of channel change,does the display of a stereo come out to the screen?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin 48 of IC701?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin53, 57 of IC701?

YES

Is there audio signal a collector of

Q8005 and Q8006.

YES

Check circuit around of J8001.

Refer to section "TUNER AUDIO

(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Change IC701.

Check ciruit around of TU301.

Change IC701.

Check IC701.

E-26

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

PB AUDIO (Hi-Fi)

DOES NOT APPEAR

Does E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) appear?

YES

Does NORMAL PB

AUDIO appear?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin 22, 24 of IC701?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin 53, 57 of IC701?

YES

Check circuit around of J8001.

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Refer to section "AT PLAY,

AUDIO DOES NOT APPEAR".

Check circuit of HEAD AMP and CYLINDER UNIT.

Change IC701.

E-27

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Hi-Fi AUDIO

CAN NOT RECORD

Does E-E AUDIO appear?

YES

AT state of video recording, is there audio signal at

pin 10 and 15 of IC701?

YES

Is there audio signal at pin 53, 57 of IC701?

YES

At recording and play,is there signal at pin 7, 8 and 9 of CP101?

YES

Check IC701.

Refer to section "E-E AUDIO

(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".

Check circuit arounf of J602,

J603 and TU301.

Change IC701.

Check CYLINDER UNIT.

E-28

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

(DVD SECTION)

DECK DOES NOT ACCEPT

OPEN/CLOSE

Is the voltage at pin 3 and

14 of IC2301 about DC9V ?

Yes

Is the lose connection at CD2602 & CD2603 to

DECK ?

Yes

Check loader block.

Check P.CON 9V line of

POWER BLOCK.

Check CD2602 & CD2603 connection to DECK.

E-29

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NO PLAYBACK PICTURE

OF AV JACK

Is there a oltage

(beam current) at

TP40 and TP42?

Yes

Is there a signal at pin

9,10,11,and 12 of

IC2601?

Yes

Is there a signal at pin

9,10,11,and 12 of

IC2601?

Yes

Is there video signal at pin 159 of IC4001?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Check loader block.

Check CP2601 and peripheral circuit.

Check IC2601 and peripheral circuit.

Check IC8005 and peripheral circuit.

E-30

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NO PLAYBACK PICTURE OF

S-VIDEO JACK

Is there Y signal at pin 161 of IC4001 ?

Yes

Is there VIDEO signal at pin 162 of IC4001 ?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Check J8013 and peripheral circuit.

REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK

PICTURE OF AV JACK ".

E-31

NO COLOR PLAYBACK PICTURE

OF S-VIDEO JACK

Is there C signal at pin 162 of IC4001 ?

Yes

Is there Y signal at pin 161 of IC4001?

Yes

Is there VIDEO signal at pin 162 of IC4001?

Yes

Is the voltage at pin 25,

64, 93,123,140 and 192 of IC4001 about 1.8V?

Yes

Change IC4001.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Check J8013 and peripheral circuit.

REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK

PICTURE OF S-VIDEO JACK".

REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK

PICTURE OF AV JACK" .

Check P.CON+3.3V line on

POWER BLOCK.

E-32

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NO AUDIO ON PLAYBACK

Is there AUDIO signal at pin 1 and 7 of IC8101 ?

Yes

Is there waveform at pin

7 and 8 of IC7301?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Check IC8101 and peripheral circuit.

Check IC7301 and peripheral circuit.

E-33

DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM

F-1

DVD LOADER

DM II

A, B, C, D, E, F

Pick up

Loading

Motor

Spindle/

Sled

Motor

CD, DVD, LD

READ

CHANNEL

IC2601

ZR36708TQC

RFA_SDEN, DATA, SCLK

AAF_CE, FE, TE, PI

FNN, FNP

VBIASS0, S1

DEFECT, LINK, MIRR, LDON

SPDL+/–

Dual OP-AMP

IC2602

BA10358F-E2

SPDL_SENS

HOME, TIN SW, TOUT SW

TR+/–, FO+/–

SPDL+/–, SLED+/–

Motor Driver

IC2301

LA6560

SPINDLE, SLED_PWM

TRACK, FOCUS_DAC

ADC IN 5, 6, 7

S MUTE

FLASH 8M

IC4007

SST39VF800A_

70-4C-EK

SDRAM 64M

IC4005

M12L64164A-7T

HA0

HA20

HD0

HD15

SDA0~SDA11

SDD0~SDD15

MPEG/MICON

IC4001

ZR36762

REG+1.8V

IC4003

PQ070XZ01ZP

EEPROM

IC4002

AT24C04N-10SI-2.7

ASDATA0

AMCLK

ABCLK

ALRCLK

STEREO DAC

IC7301

PCM1742

KE/2K

DAC A, B, C

VIDEO OUT SW

SW8101

SK42H0IG9A

Y/C SEPA

J8102

Y/U/V OUT

J8103

AUDIO AMP

IC8101

NJM4580M (TE1)

DVD AUDIO L

DVD AUDIO R

AUDIO MUTE

Q8101~Q8105

SPDIF

DIGITAL AUDIO

DRIVER

Q8107

DAC D

DVD AUDIO

OUT

J8101

OPTICAL

OS8101

VCR BLOCK

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+5V

P.CON+9V

P.CON+12V

AT+5V

CP4002

CP8102

DVD RESET

DVD VIDEO

DVD AUDIO R

DVD AUDIO L

SYSTEM MUTE

F-2

F-3

CYL

CP101

1 EP/LP-CH2 (L)

2 EP/LP_COM

EP/LP-CH1 (R)

SP-CH2 (L)

SP_COM

6 SP-CH1 (R)

HF2 (L)

HF_COM

9 HF1 (R)

HI-FI/DEMODU

LATOR

HF1

HF_COM

HF2

FE HEAD

CP103

1 FE HEAD (HOT)

2 FE HEAD (GND)

CP102

HEAD

AUDIO

CONTROL 3

AUDIO PB

AUDIO REC

CTL+

CTL-

AE HEAD(-)

AE HEAD(+)

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP BLOCK DIAGRAM

X101

3.578545M Hz

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP IC

IC101

LA71206M-MPB

50 49

Q109

BUFFER

41 39 37

Q107

BUFFER

H.SW

REC AMP

H.AMP

H.SW

AUTO BIAS

AGC

VX01

TIMMING

AGC

AMP

PULL

DRIVER

REC

FM-EQ

KIL

C-LPF

MOD

OUT

CCD

CLAMP

EMPHA

V/I

CONV

Y-LPF

DETAL

ENH

GCA

B-UP

AMP

Main

CONV

3.58M

BPF2

P ACC

AMP

DELAY

FM-EQ

PHASE-EQ

PB.EE

AMP

DOUBLE

LIM

MUTE

KIL

B.D.

DEM

ALC

DET

3.58M

BPF1

AMP

LINE

AMP

LPF

ALC

SUB

LPF

V-AGC

YNR/

N.L.

COMB

DEEM

SERIAL

DECODER

CLAMP

VCA

CLAMP

SYNC

SEP

NC1

Y/C MIX

1/2

H.AMP SW/

AUDIO

MUTE

C ROT

RF SW IN

FBC

ENV DET 59

Chara

INS.

6dB

COMP 60

OUT

11 5 4 3 2 10 80 78 76 32 30 28

COIL, BIAS OSC

L101

5 2

Q105

BIAS CTL

Q104

BIAS OSC

4 1

Q101, Q102

AUDIO PB SW

Q103

Y/C_CS

Y/C_DATA

Y/C_CLK

SYSCON

Q106

BUFFER

H. AMP_SW

C. ROTARY

H. SW

AUDIO_MUTE-H

SYSCON

ENV. DET

COMP

DUMMY_V. SYNC

C.SYNC

Y/C_VIDEO_OUT

FSC

TUNER_V_IN

TUNER/JACK

FRONT_V_IN

TO_NORMAL_A

FROM_NORMAL_A

OPERATION/

DISPLAY

HI-FI/DEMODU

LATOR

FSC

DVD V OUT

P. CON + 5V

DVD

POWER

V.REC_ST-H

CTL+

CTL-

SYSCON

F-4

F-5

SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

SYSCON/TIMER/SERVO

IC3001 OEC0138B

POWER

TUNER/JACK

POWER

DVD_POWER_CTL

VCR_POWER_ON-L

POWER_FAIL

BOT SENSOR

Q3008

AV_SW2

DVD RESET

OPERATION/

DISPLAY

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

SEG_5

SEG_1

VCR_LED

DVD_LED

2G/DUB/REC_LED

KEY-B

KEY-A

REM_IN

CAPSTAN

DD UNIT

CP3001

11 CYL FG/PG

12 CYL DRIVE

10 LDM CTL

5 I LIMIT

9 CAP CTL

1 CAP FG

4 CAP.M F/R

2 CAP VCO

8 LD/CY_VCO

AT+12.6V

P.CON +5V

CENT LED

D3001

MS_SEN B

Q3004

AT 5.2V

EOT SENSOR

Q3006

REEL SENS

Q3001

POWER

X1001

10MHz

MS_SEN A

Q3005

P.CON+5V

REEL SENS

Q3002

45 DVD_POWER_CTL

41 POWER ON-L

37 POWER FAIL

OSC 2

78 OSC 1

64 TX

91 AV SW2

44 DVD/RESET

48 1G/VCR/T-REC LED

63 SEG5

55 SEG1

47 VCR LED

DVD LED

2G/DUB/REC LED

KEY-B

30 KEY-A

43 REM IN

25 BOT-H

26 EOT-H

39 REEL-T

38 REEL-S

103 CYL SPEED UP

104 DFG/PG

107 DRUM PWM

LD M CTL

102 CAP FULL

108 CAP PWM

84 CAP LIMIT

9 CAP FG

98 CAP FWD-L

28 MS SEN-A

27 MS SEN-B

RESET 77

SEG 10

SEG 9

SEG 8

SEG 7 67

SEG 6 66

3G/TV/VCR LED

4G/TIME SHIFT LED

5G/CB/BS LED 52

SEG 2 58

SEG 3 59

SEG 4 60

HIFI ENV 32

HIFI H.SW 106

ST SELECT 31

4 FSC OUT

4 FSC IN 22

C.SYNC 111

DUMMY V.SYNC

109

VIDEO H.SW

105

C.ROTARY

Y/C CS 93

AUDIO MUTE-H 95

H.AMP SW 100

V.REC ST-H 96

V ENV 24

CTL(+) 3

CTL(-) 4

Y/C DATA 54

Y/C CLK 53

COMP 101

AV SW1

CV IN1 16

CV IN2 17

POWER MUTE L

AFT S.CURVE

CV OUT 19

VCR-H 86

IIC CLK 61

IIC SDA 62

VIDEO MUTE H 40

SYS_MUTE 88

RF_CH_SW 94

TAB SW 35

X3003

14.3818MHz

REC SAFTY

IC3003

PST3231NR

1 SYSTEM

RESET

V.REC_ST-H

AUDIO_MUTE-H

IIC_CLK

IIC_DATA

HIFI_ENV.DET

HIFI_H.SW

ST_SELECT

C.SYNC

DUMMY_V.SYNC

H.SW

C.ROTARY

Y/C CS

AUDIO_MUTE-H

H.AMP_SW

V.REC_ST-H

ENV.DET

CTL+

CTL-

Y/C_DATA

Y/C_CLK

COMP

AV_SW1

SW_V_ OUT

POWER_MUTE-L

AFT-S.CURVE

VIDEO_OUT

TV/VCR

IIC_CLK

IIC_DATA

VIDEO_MUTE-H

SYS_MUTE

RF_CH_SW

6 SCL

5 SDA

EEPROM

IC3099

AT24C04N-10SI-2.7

AT+5V

SEG 10

SEG 9

SEG 8

SEG 7

SEG 6

3G/TV/VCR_LED

4G/TIME SHIFT_LED

5G/CB/BS_LED

SEG 2

SEG 3

SEG 4

HI-FI/

DEMODULATOR

Y/C/AUDIO/

CCD/HEAD AMP

TUNER/JACK

POWER

OPERATION/

DISPLAY

F-6

F-7

OPERATION/DISPLAY BLOCK DIAGRAM

V651 LTG-0366AM-J

AUDIO R

J603

2 3

FRONT AV JACK

AUDIO L

J602

VIDEO

J601

14 15 13 12 11 10 8 9 7 5 4 6 2 1 3

Q651

5G SW

Q653

SEG9 SW

Q652

SEG10 SW

Q654

4G SW

Q655

SEG8 SW

Q657

SEG6 SW

Q659

3G SW

Q656

SEG7 SW

Q658

SEG5 SW

Q660

SEG4 SW

Q661

2G SW

Q662

SEG3 SW

Q663

SEG2 SW

Q665

1G SW

Q664

SEG1 SW

OS601

REC/OTR

CH DOWN

POWER

VCR EJECT

CH UP

VCR LED

D602 4 VCR_LED

2 REM_IN

AT+5.2V

KEY-B

6 KEY-A

CP603

STOP

FF/CUE

PLAY

REW/REV

VCR/DVD

OPEN CLOSE

CP602

CP601

FRONT V IN 12

FRONT A IN L 10

FRONT A IN R 8

VCR LED 4

REM IN

AT+5.2V

KEY-B

KEY-A

CP681

KEY-A

KEY-B

DVD LED

CP652

CP651

DVD LED

D685

Q666

DVD LED SW

5G/CS/BS_LED

SEG10

SEG9

4G/T_SHT_LED

SEG8

SEG7

SEG6

SEG5

3G/TV/VCR_LED

SEG4

2G/DUB/REC_LED

SEG3

SEG2

SEG1

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

FRONT_V_IN

SYSCON

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/

HEAD AMP

FRONT_A_IN_L

FRONT_A_IN_R

VCR_LED

REM IN

KEY-A

KEY-B

DVD_LED

HI-FI/

DEMODULATOR

SYSCON

AT+5.2V

POWER

F-8

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD

/HEAD AMP

HF1

HF2

HF_COM

FSC

FROM_NORMAL_A

TO_NORMAL_A

POWER

P.CON+5V

P.CON+12V

F-9

Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM

HIFI AUDIO/H.AMP/DEM IC

IC701

AN3663FBP

22 AMP

24 AMP

AGC

L/R

MIX

OUTPUT

REC

LPF

VCO

INPUT SW

AMP

RFC

PNR

VCO-FO

ADJ

LOGIC

BPF

FM LIM

DBX

NOISE

REDUCTION

DEM

BLOCK

LOGIC

FRONT_A_IN-R

FRONT_A_IN-L

DVD_A_OUT-R

DVD_A_OUT-L

REAR_A_IN_L

REAR_A_IN_R

AUDIO_OUT_R

AUDIO_OUT_L

RF_CONV_A.OUT

OPERATION/

DISPLAY

TUNER/JACK

SIF OUT

V. REC_ST-H

HIFI_ENV. DET

HIFI_H.SW

AUDIO_MUTE-H

IIC_CLK

IIC_DATA

ST_SELECT

SYSCON

F-10

F-11

SYSCON

VIDEO MUTE H

VIDEO_OUT

SW V OUT

POWER

P. CON+12V

+32V

P.CON+5V

TU301

TUNER/JACK BLOCK DIAGRAM

REAR OUT JACK

J8001

2 3 5

REAR IN JACK

J8002

6 4 3 2

Q8004

BUFFER

Q8003

VIDEO

MUTE SW

Q301

MUTE SW

Q8005

MUTE SW

Q8006

MUTE SW

Q8007

MUTE SW

AV SW

IC8002

MM1501XNRE

Vcc 3

AV SW

IC8005

MM1501XNRE

FSC

TU/REAR_V_IN

Y/C VIDEO OUT

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/

HEAD AMP

FRONT_A_IN-R

FRONT_A_IN-L

AUDIO_OUT_R

AUDIO_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT-R

DVD_A_OUT-L

RF_CONV_A. OUT

SIF OUT

POWER MUTE_L

TV/VCR

IIC_CLK

IIC_DATA

HI-FI/

DEMODULATOR

SYSCON

RF_CH_SW

AV SW2

AFT-S. CURVE

AV SW1

SYS_MUTE

DVD_RESET

CP8002

DVD_RESET

SYS_MUTE

DVD_VIDEO

DVD_AUDIO_L

DVD_AUDIO_R

F-12

F-13

AC IN

L501

D505, D506

D502, D503

T501

Q501

SW.

Q502

CONTROL

IC503

PS2561L1-1-V(W)

PHOTO

COUPLER

IC501

KIA431

VOLTAGE

CTL. IC

3 1

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

Q508

3.3V CTL

Q510

P.CON+12V

Q509

P.CON SW

Q511

3.3V OUT

Q507

3.3V CTL

Q506

M-CON

POWER SW.

Q530

PROTECT

Q531

PROTECT

Q504

M-CON+5V

SW.

Q503

P.CON+5V

SW.

Q513

POWER FAIL

SW.

Q514

POWER FAIL

SW.

9VREG

IC502

KIA78R09API

1 2

Q505

P.CON 5V

SW.

AT+12.6V

SYSCON

P.CON+12V TUNER/JACK

VCR POWER ON-L SYSCON

AT+5.2V

P.CON+5V

OPERATION/DISPLAY

AT+5V (M-CON)

SYSCON

POWER FAIL

DVD POWER CTL

P.CON+5V

P.CON+12V

P.CON+5V

AT+5.2V

+32V

Y/C/AUDIO/

CCD/HEAD AMP

HI-FI/

DEMODULATOR

TUNER/JACK

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+5V

CP501

P.CON+9V A

P.CON+12V

AT+5V

DVD

SYSCON

F-14

G-1

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD (TOP SIDE)

HS2301

IC2301

CP4002

C2649

W861 R2635

CP2602

L4001

C4086

R4033 IC4003

C4085

R4022

R2323

C4064

R4046

C4001

R2610

C2621

C4039

W828

W829

W836

R4041

W837

IC4007

C4062

C2617

R2603

C2654

R2644

R2604

C2618

R2643

C2616

R2614 C2629

C2633

C2628

C2624

C2635

C2625

C2607

C2606

C2605

C2604

C2603 Q2601 Q2602

D2601

D8101 Q8106

D8102

Q8101 CP8102

R8132

B8101 R8131

Q8107

D8113

D8109

C4004 C4006

157

C4007

R4002

R4003

R4005

R4004

Q8103

Q8102

R8121

IC4001

C8133

W831

C8130 C8131 C8132

J8101

OS8101

J8103

105 R8111

D8110

D8106

D8111

D8107

D8112

D8108

L8105

L8106

SW8101

IC4005

J8102

CP2603

CP2601

W811

DVD (BOTTOM SIDE)

Q8104 Q8105

D8103

W869

W872

B7302

W874

R2651

G-2

G-5

Q530

R510

Q531

R530

Q507

Q508

Q509

Q506

Q514

Q513

R525

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

VCR (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

Q8003

IC8002

Q666

R3046

Q8007

R108

R3003

R3056

R3035

R3031

Q3007

Q3003

R3053

R3027

C3018

R3022

R3012

R3030

R3057

IC3001

R3087

Q664

R509

Q651

R675

Q665

Q661

Q654

Q659

Q662

Q663

Q660

Q655

Q658

Q657

Q656

Q653

Q652

R668

IC3003

R3051

R3037

R3045

Q101

Q102

Q103

R110

IC101

R127

R126

R121

Q106

R141

R143

R122

Q107 Q109

R133

R132

R3006

IC3099_1

IC8005

Q8005

R8056

R8015

R8014

R8032

R8017 Q8006

R710

R714

R707

IC701

R706

R716

R711

R703

R304

R305

Q301

G-6

G-7

SW601 SW602

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

OPERATION1

SOLDER SIDE

CP603

VECA42A

SW603 SW604

SW605

C604

OS601

D602

OPERATION 2

SOLDER SIDE

D685

DVD LED

SW691

VCR/DVD

VECA43A

SW689

CP681

SW686 SW685

OPEN/CLOSE

SW690

FRONT JACK

SOLDER SIDE

VIDEO

J601

C601

J602

AUDIO L

J603

AUDIO R

VECA44A

CP602

RELAY (INSERTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

CP1

RELAY (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

S1005X

S1004X

S1001X

S1003X

S1002X

SW

SOLDER SIDE

S1004Y

S1005Y

0 0

SW2

G-8

FROM/TO MEMORY

D_GND

P.CON+3.3V

HA16

HA17

HA18

HA19

HA20

HD0

HD1

HD2

HA9

HA10

HA11

HA12

HA13

HA14

HA15

HA0

HA1

HA2

HA3

HA4

HA5

HA6

HA7

HA8

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

HD8

HD9

HD10

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

MEMCS0

SD_D7

SD_D8

SD_D9

SD_D10

SD_D11

SD_D12

SD_D13

SD_D14

SD_D15

RAMCS0#

RAMCS1#

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

SD_BA0

RAMDQM

RAMWE#

RAMCLK

SD_A0

SD_A1

SD_A2

SD_A3

SD_A4

SD_A5

SD_A6

SD_A7

SD_A8

SD_A9

SD_A10

SD_A11

SD_D0

SD_D1

SD_D2

SD_D3

SD_D4

SD_D5

SD_D6

C4038

0.01 B

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

DUPTD0

DUPRD0

P.CON+5V

R4053

R4054

W832

D E

MPEG/MICON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD PCB)

C4088

0.01 B

C4089

0.01

C4090

0.01

B W833

R4002

R4003

R4004

R4005

V_GND

GND

75 +-1%

82 +-1%

75 +-1%

W831

HD11

HD3

HA19

HD10

HA18

HD2

HA17

HD9

HA7

HD1

HA6

HD8

HA5

HD0

HA4

HA3

HA2

MEMCS0

HA1

HA0

HA10

HD14

HA9

HD6

HA8

HD13

HD5

HA20

HD12

HD4

HA15

HA16

HA14

HA13

HA12

HD15

HA11

HD7

C4008

0.1

C4010 0.1 F

C4013 0.1 F

C4014 0.1 F

C4016 0.1 F

C4017 0.1 F

+1.8V

+3.3V

2.6

1.9

2.1

2.0

3.3

0.6

3.3

3.0

3.3

0.5

0.6

2.7

0.6

0.4

5.5

3.3

0.4

3.3

3.1

3.2

3.3

0.5

0.6

3.3

2.6

1.8

2.7

2.9

208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157

SSCRXD

MEMCS(1)

VDDP

MEMAD(15)

MEMAD(16)

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

VDD-IP

DUPTD0

DUPRD0

MEMAD(14)

MEMAD(13)

MEMAD(12)

MEMDA(15)

MEMAD(11)

MEMDA(7)

GNDP

MEMAD(10)

MEMDA(14)

MEMAD(9)

MEMDA(6)

MEMAD(8)

MEMDA(13)

208

207

206

205

SSCTXD

SSCCLK

SPINDLEPULSE

SLEDPULSE

160

159

158

157

VDDDAC

CVBS/C

CVBS/G/Y

GNDDACD

GNDP

IDGPCI/O(3)

GPCI/O(34)

ICGPCI/O(5)

GPCI/O(33)

ICGPCI/O(4)

GPCI/O(32)

VDDP

GCLKA

GCLKP

MEMDA(5)

MEMAD(20)

VDDP

MEMDA(12)

MEMWR#

MEMDA(4)

VDDC

MEMDA(11) MPEG/MICON IC

VDDA

RESET#

GNDA

IDGPCI/O(2)

GPCI/O(31)

VID(0)

VID(1)

VID(2)

VID(3)

V SW

MEMDA(3)

MEMAD(19)

GNDC

MEMDA(10)

MEMAD(18)

GNDP

MEMDA(2)

MEMAD(17)

MEMDA(9)

MEMAD(7)

MEMDA(1)

MEMAD(6)

MEMDA(8)

IC4001

ZR36762

D1 2

D1 1

VID(7)

VDDP

MEMAD(5)

VDDP

MEMDA(0)

MEMAD(4)

MEMRD#

MEMAD(3)

MEMAD(2)

MEMCS(0)#

MEMAD(1)

MEMAD(0)

RAMADD(4)

RAMADD(3)

RAMADD(5)

RAMADD(2)

100 RAMDAT(14)

101

102

103

104

GNDP

RAMDAT(1)

RAMDAT(15)

RAMDAT(0)

ALRCLK

GPAI/O

AOUT(0)

AOUT(1)

AOUT(2)

SPDIF

IDGPCI/O(0)

ICGPCI/O(0)

GNDP

VDD-IP

VDDP

GNDP

GPCI/O(20)

VDDP

53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104

STBY-L

GNDP

HSYNC

VDDC

VSYNC

GNDC

AIN

VDDP-A2

AMCLK

GNDP-A2

ABCLK

3.3

1.6

3.3

1.7

1.6

3.3

5.0

3.3

5.1

3.3

3.1

3.3

1.8

3.3

5.0

TRAY_OPEN

TRAY_CLOSE

R4042

HOME

DJTDO

DJTDI

DJTMS

ICETCK

ICETDO

ICETDI

A_MUTE

R4024

4.7K

F G H

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

DAC_VIDEO_C

DAC_VIDEO_B

DAC_VIDEO_D

DAC_VIDEO_A

ASDATA0

ABCLK

ALRCLK

AMCLK

SPDIF

V_SW

RESET

AT+5V

P.CON+12V

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+A5V

P.CON+5V

GND

D_GND

B4002 FCM2012H-102T04

B4003 FCM2012H-102T04

B4001 FCM2012H-102T04

B4004 FCM2012H-102T04

B4005 FCM2012H-102T04

TP4012

C4033

TP4013

0.1 F

C4032

C4096

0.001 B

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

DUPTD0

DUPRD0

VR_SEL

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW

SMUTE

C4027 0.1 F

X4001

100BT02701

27MHz

C4028 0.1 F

TP4014

R4019

R4020

R4021

R4047

C4035

22P CH

R4016

RESET

100

C4081

0.1 F HOME

LDON

TP4004

TP4006

TP4007

TP4005 MD

V_SW

TP4010

C4029

0.1

C4030 0.1 F

I2CDAT

I2CCLK

0.01

C4031

B IAMCLK

IABCLK

IALRCLK

R4025

AMCLK

R4026

R4027

220

100 ABCLK

100 ALRCLK

ASDATA0

ASDATA1

ASDATA2

TP4015

TP4016

SPDIF

C4026 0.1 F

R4014 4.7K

TP4008

TP4009

I2CCLK

I2CDAT

GND

R4031

R4035

3.2

SDA

3.2

SCL

4.7K

3.3

VCC

REG+1.8V IC

IC4003

PQ070XZ01ZP

3.3

V_IN V_C

V_OUT V_ADJ GND

1 2 3 4 5

3.3

1.9

1.2

P.CON+3.3V

B4006

FCM2012H-102T04

FROM/TO RF AMP/DSP

HOME

SPDL_SENS

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW

RFA_SDEN

RFA_DATA

RFA_SCLK

AAF_CE

AAF_FE

AAF_TE

AAF_PI

VR_SEL

FNN

FNP

VBIASS0

VBIASS1

DEFECT

LINK

MIRR

LDON

SMUTE

TRACK_DAC

FOCUS_DAC

SPINDLE_PWM

SLED_PWM

P.CON+A5V

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+9V

P.CON+5V

ADCIN_7

ADCIN_6

ADCIN_5

D_GND

M_GND

GND

TP4003

DUPRD1

DUPTD1

P.CON+3.3V

C4092

100P CH

C4066

100P CH

1 B

C4091

GND

P.CON+5V

D_GND

P.CON+A5V

L4001

2.2uH 0305

W827

P.CON+9V

M_GND

W802

W801

P.CON+12V

AT+5V

C4087

0.01

FROM/TO POWER

CP4002 (CP501)

A2001WV2-12P

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+5V

P.CON+9V A

MOTOR GND

P.CON+12V

AT+5V

PCB130

VMC298

BOOTSEL2 BOOTSEL1

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL(PB)

A B C D E F G H

H-1 H-2

H-3

A B

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON

HD7

HD8

HD9

HD10

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

MEMCS0

HA20

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HA12

HA13

HA14

HA15

HA16

HA17

HA18

HA19

RAMDQM

RAMWE#

RAMCLK

HA0

HA1

HA2

HA3

HA4

HA5

HA6

HA7

HA8

HA9

HA10

HA11

SD_D5

SD_D6

SD_D7

SD_D8

SD_D9

SD_D10

SD_D11

SD_D12

SD_D13

SD_D14

SD_D15

RAMCS0#

RAMCS1#

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

SD_BA0

SD_A0

SD_A1

SD_A2

SD_A3

SD_A4

SD_A5

SD_A6

SD_A7

SD_A8

SD_A9

SD_A10

SD_A11

SD_D0

SD_D1

SD_D2

SD_D3

SD_D4

P.CON+3.3V

D_GND

FROM AUDIO/VIDEO

RESET

C D E

MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD PCB)

HA16

C4064

0.1 F

HD15

HD7

HD14

HD6

HD13

HD5

HD12

HD4

HD2

HD9

HD1

HD11

HD3

HD10

HD8

HD0

C4062

0.1 F

MEMCS0

W854

B4007

FCM2012H-102T04

B4008

FCM2012H-102T04

HA0

1.2

IC4007

A16

3.3

VCCQ

VSS

0.7

DQ15

1.9

DQ7

1.3

DQ14

1.2

DQ6

0.6

DQ13

0.7

DQ5

0.8

DQ12

1.6

DQ4

3.3

VDD

1.6

DQ11

1.6

DQ3

1.3

DQ10

1.2

DQ2

1.4

DQ9

1.4

DQ1

0.9

DQ8

1.6

DQ0

2.6

DE#

VSS

2.6

CE#

2.5

FLASH IC 8M

SST39VF800A-70-4C-EK

1.7

A15

1.0

A14

0.8

A13

1.5

A12

2.5

A11

1.3

A10

1.6

1.5

A19

A20

3.3

WE#

RP#

VPP

WP#

A19

HA15

HA14

HA13

HA12

HA11

HA10

HA9

HA8

HA19

HA20

0 W835

RESET

0.1

W828

0.1

W829 R4041

4.7K

C4039

0.1

W837

HA19

A18

1.6

HA18

A17

0.7

HA17

1.4

HA7

1.6

HA6

1.6

HA5

1.3

HA4

1.7

HA3

2.5

HA2

1.6

HA1

SD_D15

SD_D14

SD_D13

C4040

SD_D12

0.1 F

SD_D11

SD_A8

SD_A7

1.5

2.0

3.3

0.4

0.5

SD_D10

SD_D9

SD_D8

C4041

0.1 F

RAMDQM

RAMCLK

SD_A11

SD_A9

1.7

0.8

3.3

1.5

R4048

3.3

47K 0

0.2

2.1

0.2

1.0

SD_A6

SD_A5

SD_A4

1.2

1.0

0.9

IC4005

64M SDRAM IC

M12L64164A-7T

BA1

A10/AP

CAS

RAS

BA0

VDD

DQ4

VDDQ

DQ5

DQ6

VSSQ

DQ7

VDD

LDQM

VDD

DQ0

VDDQ

DQ1

DQ2

VSSQ

DQ3

CLK

CKE

A11

VSS

DQ11

VSSQ

DQ10

DQ9

VDDQ

DQ8

VSS

UDQM

VSS

DQ15

VSSQ

DQ14

DQ13

VDDQ

DQ12

3.3

1.5

3.3

0.8

0.4

0.5

0.9

3.3

1.3

0.8

1.3

3.3

3.2

0.2

3.1

0.5

3.1

1.9

0.2

0.3

3.3

C4045

0.1 F

C4044

0.1 F

C4050

0.1 F

SD_D0

SD_D1

SD_D2

SD_D3

SD_D4

SD_D5

SD_D6

SD_D7

C4046

0.1 F

RAMDQM

RAMWE#

RAMCAS#

RAMRAS#

RAMCS1#

SD_BA0

RAMCS0#

SD_A10

SD_A0

SD_A1

SD_A2

SD_A3

C4047

0.1 F

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D E

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

F G

PCB130

VMC298

H-4

A B C D E

RF AMP/DSP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD PCB)

F G H

FROM/TO LODER

CP2601

09-5000-024-001

1 T-

T+

F-

F+

MON(DVD)

NC(SW)

VOL(DVD)

GND(DVD)

LD(DVD)

LD(CD)

VOL(CD)

GND(CD)

MON(COM)

GND(NC)

VCC

Vref

GND(PDIC)

C2634

0.1

C2648

0.1

FROM/TO LODER

CP2602

00_6232_008_006_800

1 SLD-

SLD+

SP1-

SP1+

LIMIT SW

GND

+5V

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SLED+

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SPDL+

R2649

HOME

100

FROM/TO LODER

CP2603

A2001WV2-3P

1 CLOSE

GND(D)

OPEN

OPU_RF

OPU_C

OPU_B

OPU_A

OPU_D

OPU_F

OPU_E

OPU_VREF

TR-

TR+

FO-

FO+

DVDPD

VR_DVD

DVDLD

CDLD

VR_CD

RF_GND

CDPD

P.CON+A5V

MOT_SPDL+ R2625

MOT_SPDLR2626

R2620

0.7

4.7K

VR DVD CTL

Q2603

2SK3018

0.5

R2647

4.7K

VR CD CTL

Q2604

2SK3018

VR SEL CTL

Q2605

2SK3018

0.7

R2623

4.7K

TP8

OPU_RF

C2635

0.001 B

OPU_D

OPU_C

OPU_B

OPU_A

C2603

C2604

C2605

C2606

0.0022 B

C2607

2.5

3.7

33P CH

3.7

TP19

2.7

TP20

2.7

TP21

2.7

TP22

2.6

2.5

2.7

2.6

TP12 TP11

FNN

FNP

TP10 TP9

W807

W810

1.5

DVDRFN

CD_D

CD_C

CD_B

2.6

3.1

4.3

5.1

2.4

2.6

3.5

2.3

5.1

DVDRFP

CD_A

3.7

5.1

0.2

READ CHANNEL IC

IC2601

ZR36708TQC

0.2

24 25

0 3.3

4.7K

R2601

SDEN

LINK

SDATA

SCLK

V33

LCP

LCN

MNTR

V25

V125

TPH

DFT

28 29 30 31

2.7

2.2

2.3

2.9

0.2

R2602

R2645

R2611 4.7K

1.5

R2612 4.7K

3.3

4.2

C2616

4.1

470P CH

R2643

1.8

1.7

R2607

1.8

R2608

1.2K

1.6

1.2K

R2609

1.2K

3.3

1.7

R2605

10K +-1%

3.3

C2617

0.1

R2613

C2654

R2644

C2619

C2620

C2621

C2622

C2623

R2610

4.7K

0.01 B

2.2K

560P CH

0.0056 B

0.1 F

C2618

0.1

5.1K

C2615 0.1

R2646

1.8M

2.2K

C2655

0.01 B

W811

+-1%

TP26

TP38

TP35

TP33

TP15

RFA_SDEN

TP16

RFA_DATA

TP17

RFA_SCLK

TP18

AAF_CE

AAF_FE

AAF_TE

AAF_PI

VBIASS0

VBIASS1

DEFECT

LINK

RF_GND

D_GND

RF_A5V

W806

4.7K

W876

R2310

5.6K

R2627

1.5K

R2312

5.6K

R2631

5.2

+IN2

0.7

-IN2

7.3

OUT2

R2306

5.6K

5.2

VCC

B2603

FCM2012H-102T04

C2305

220P CH

B2605

FCM2012H-102T04

B2604

C2309

0.001 B

3.3

2.5 2.5

2.5

2.6

33 32 31 30

5.0

NC 0

28 38

NC NC 2.5

27 26 25

2.5

2.6

24 23

2.5

3.0

21 20

2.5

P.CON+5V

FCM2012H-102T04

C2312

0.001 B

R2648

13K

GND

+IN1

5.2

-IN1

4.1

OUT1

4.1

RF_GND

W808

SGND

R2652

100

R2653

100

TIN_SW

TOUT_SW

P.CON+3.3V

DVDLD

B2601

FCM2012H-102T04

TP043 TP39

R2615

DVD LD CTL

Q2601

2SA1036K

4.5

3.9

D2601

KDS120RTK

1.0

R2616

C2640

6.3V

100 YK

TP40

CDLD

B2602

FCM2012H-102T04

C2641

1.0

6.3V

100 YK

R2617

3.9

4.5

CD LD CTL

Q2602

2SA1036K

R2618

TP41

TP42

D_GND

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

B C D

W861

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

9.1

3 4 5 6

0.2

NC NC

4.0

4.3

4.1

9 37 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

5.3 3.1 4.2 4.2

9.1 2.5

0 2.5

2.5

R2328

R2325

4.7K

6.8K

C2302 0.1

R2303 2.2

C2303

R2304

0.1 B

2.2

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

C2307 0.1 B

C2308 0.1 B

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

H-5

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON

SPDL_SENS

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW

RFA_SDEN

RFA_DATA

RFA_SCLK

AAF_CE

AAF_FE

AAF_TE

AAF_PI

VR_SEL

FNN

FNP

VBIASS0

VBIASS1

DEFECT

LINK

MIRR

LDON

HOME

GND

D_GND

P.CON+5V

P.CON+A5V

P.CON+3.3V

SMUTE

TRACK_DAC

FOCUS_DAC

SPINDLE_PWM

SLED_PWM

ADCIN_7

ADCIN_5

ADCIN_6

P.CON+9V

M_GND

PCB130

VMC298

H-6

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON

P.CON+A5V

DAC_VIDEO_A

DAC_VIDEO_C

DAC_VIDEO_B

DAC_VIDEO_D

P.CON+5V

P.CON+3.3V

AT+5V

P.CON+12V

V_SW

RESET

AMCLK

ABCLK

ALRCLK

ASDATA0

SPDIF

GND

D_GND

SPDIF

B C

AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD PCB)

DVD_AUDIO_L

R8134

DVD_AUDIO_R

470

R8135 470

B8101

FCM2012H-102T04

B8102

R8130

2.2K

OPTICAL

OS8101

OFTG038101

1 INPUT

VCC

GND

1.7

1.2

D AUDIO DRIVER

Q8107

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

B8103

FCM2012H-102T04

DVD AUDIO OUT

J8101

MSP-213V1-732_NI_FL

2 3

DAC_VIDEO_A

DAC_VIDEO_C

DAC_VIDEO_B

DAC_VIDEO_D

C8134

12P CH

L8101

1uH 0305

C8135

12P CH

L8102

1uH 0305

C8136

12P CH

L8103

1uH 0305

C8137

12P CH

L8104

1uH 0305

W819

W820

Y/C SEPA

J8102

MDC-070V

4 3

6 5

C8146

C8144

6.3V

470 YK

W865

C8145

6.3V

470 YK

3 2

YUV OUT

J8103

MSP-213V1-652 NI LF

G H

2 3 4

G CVBS Y

CVBS CVBS CVBS

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO

NC NC

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

NC NC NC

L H

S/CVBS

VIDEO OUT SW

SW8101

COMP

SK42H01G9A

AT+5V

P.CON+12V

TO MEMORY

RESET

H-7

B7301

FCM2012H-102T04

B7302

FCM2012H-102T04 R7307

10K

C7310

50V 2.2

R7306

10K

C7308

50V 2.2

2.6

5.2

3.2

3.1

2.6

2.9

11 12

3.0

2.9

3.1

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

B C

R8102

100K

R8101

10K

C8106

0.0015 B

R8108

10K

R8104

10K

5.8

R8106

5.8

11.6

47K

C8112

50V 22 YK

R8112

470

R8113

C8113

50V 22 YK

R8115

470

C8105

0.0015 B

R8111 R8114

10K 1K

R8123

4.7K

3.2

2.6

ZERO

MUTE SW

Q8106

KRC104SRTK

SYS_MUTE

DVD_AUDIO_R

D8101

5.0

MCL4148

MUTE SW.

Q8102

KRC103SRTK 0.6

0.3

MUTE DET

Q8101

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

5.0

MUTE SW.

Q8103

KRA101SRTK

-0.2

R8124

R8122

-0.3

MUTE SW

Q8104

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

-0.3

MUTE SW

Q8105

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

DVD_AUDIO_L

DVD_AUDIO_R

DVD_AUDIO_L

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO

SYS_MUTE

RESET

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

FROM/TO TUNER/JACK

CP8102 (CP8002)

IMSA-9604S-08C

DVD_AUDIO_R

GND

DVD_AUDIO_L

GND

SYS_MUTE

DVD_RESET

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO 4

6 1.25m FFC

CD8002 2F080601

R.SIGNAL

B.SIGNAL

+ COMPONENT SIGNAL(U)

+ COMPONENT SIGNAL(V)

PCB130

VMC298

PLAYBACK COLOR SIGNAL

PLAYBACK LUMINANCE SIGNAL

PLAYBACK VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL(PB)

DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL(PB)

H-8

A B C D E

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(VCR PCB)

F G

R129

3.9

BUFFER

Q109

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

4.9

1.8K

3.3

FROM POWER

P.CON+5V

GND

FROM/TO HI-FI/DEMODULATOR

FSC

TO_NORMAL_A

FROM_NORMAL_A

HF1

HF_COM

HF2

A.VCC

FROM/TO CYL

CP101

TOC-C09X-A1

9 HF1 (R)

HF_COM

HF2 (L)

SP-CH1 (R)

SP_COM

SP-CH2 (L)

EP/LP-CH1 (R)

EP/LP COM

EP/LP-CH2 (L)

P.CON+5V

L107

22uH 0305

C103_2

A.VCC

TO_NORMAL_A

R105

16V 22 KA

P.CON+5V

6.3V

C174

47 KA

C129

1 B

FROM/TO HEAD AUDIO CONTROL

CP102

IMSA-9604S-06C

AUDIO REC

AUDIO PB

CTL+

CTL-

AE HEAD(+)

AE HEAD(-)

FFC

CD102

2H061504

CTL+

CTL-

V.REC_ST-H

2.2K

AUDIO PB SW

Q101

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

0.7

R140

560

1/4W

R101

R102

10K

5.2

5.3

Q103

DTA124EKA

TO FULL ERASE HEAD

CP103

B2013H02-2P

FE HEAD(GND)

FE HEAD(HOT)

GND

HOT

AUDIO PB SW

Q102

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

0.7

R103

10K

C142_2

6.3V

R127

47 KA

C143

1 F

680K

C141

0.01

L103

5.6uH

16V

C166

0.068 B

0.047 F

C105_2

COIL,BIAS OSC

L101

1626009

C165

C169

0.047 F

C109

0.1

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP IC

IC101

LA71206M-MPB

2.1

2.9

1.6

1.8

1.9

1.8

5.0

1.8

1.6

1.8

2.3

4.9

2.3

4.8

60 59

KILL

DET

GND

CHROMA

DET

ACC

DET

ENV

DET

0 5.2

58 57

AUDIO

MUTE

HA SW

C-ROT C-GND

RF-SW

5.2

SERAIL

DECODER

4.9

C-VCC

2.1

4.8

4.1

VX01

REC

APC

R P

3.2

320FH

VCO

3.3

3.2

4.9

1.2

2.2

0.8

45 44 43 42 41

SLD B

ALWAYS

VDD 4Fsc

PLL

CLOCK

VSS

P R

TIMMING OUT

OUT

APC

REC

AFC DRIVER

BEFORE

BGA

CCD

AUTO-BIAS

VSS

CLAMP

AFTER

CNC

BGA

R P VCA

P R

AMP

VCA

3.58M

BPF2

CLAMP

C-LPF

Main

CONV

B-UP

AMP

B.D

VCP HA VCC

ACC

AMP

3.58M

BPF1

ACC

DET

CLAMP

PB-C

PRE GND

4.21M

BPF

Sub

CONV

DETAIL

ENH

EMPHA

Y-LPF

YNR/COMB

N.L.

DEEM

PB-C

NC1

Y/C

MIX

VIDEO

AGC

1/2

FBC

REG

BAL

TC1

MOD

NORMAL

AGC

TC2

A-GND

R-EQ

TEST

QV/QH 6DB

LINE

AMP

DOUBBLE

LIM

DEM

SUB

LPF

A-VCC

ALC

LPF REC

FM-EQ

MAIN

DE-EM

SYNC

SEP

V.SYNC

SEP

ALC

DET VREF

P R

AGC

FM EQ

VHS

S-EQ

SOPB

P R

2.3

AMP

SP,LP

PB,EE

Vref

2.3V

2.3

3 4

2.3

PB,EE

REC:LP<EP

PB:EP

2.3

REC

AMP

MUTE

0.8

4.8

AUTO

BIAS

PHASE

EQ fo-ADJ

PHASE

Q-ADJ

12 13

1.1

1.4

2.0

AGC

FIL

Y-GND

0 2.6

P R Y-VCC

MAIN

EMPHA

FIL

2.6

0.2

DET

2.8

1.6

3.2

2.5

3.2

3.3

2.6

4.1

2.3

2.1

1.6

3.6

4.1

5.0

4.4

3.2

2.1

C133

1 F

C134

50V 1 KA

50V

35V

C135

0.22

C136

50V

BUFFER

Q107

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

C132

1.6

2.2

C137_1

50V

1 KA

C139

0.1

16V 4.7

R124

82K

C140_1

KANP

R121

50V

R122

100K

C138

R120 3.6

220

4.2

BUFFER

Q106

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

W809

R109

1/4W

R114

20K

C122

L102

0.0012

100uH 0305

5.2

BIAS OSC

Q104

KTC3203_Y

5.2

BIAS CTL

Q105

KTA1266

C112

6.3V

220 KA

R108

22K

R112

330K

C118

0.01

V.ENV

TP101

C110_1

16V 47 YK

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

4FSC

FSC

TU/REAR_V_IN

FRONT_V_IN

R143

R141

DVD_V_OUT[DAC_D]

Y/C_VIDEO_OUT

C.SYNC

DUMMY_V.SYNC

P.CON+5V

AUDIO SIGNAL(REC)

AUDIO SIGNAL(PB)

PLAYBACK COLOR SIGNAL

PLAYBACK LUMINANCE SIGNAL

TUNER VIDEO SIGNAL

A B C D E F G

H-9

FROM/TO TUNER/JACK

DVD_V_OUT[DAC_D]

TU/REAR_V_IN

Y/C_VIDEO_OUT

FSC

FROM OPERATION/DISPLAY

FRONT_V_IN

FROM/TO SYSCON

4FSC

Y/C_CLK

Y/C_DATA

Y/C_CS

DUMMY_V.SYNC

V.REC_ST-H

C.ROTARY

AUDIO_MUTE-H

CTL-

CTL+

H.AMP_SW

COMP

ENV.DET

H.SW

C.SYNC

PCB010

VMC300

PLAYBACK VIDEO SIGNAL

RECORD COLOR SIGNAL

RECORD LUMINANCE SIGNAL

H-10

FROM/TO POWER

DVD_POWER_CTL

AT+12.6_V

P.CON+5V

AT+5V[M-CON]

VCR_POWER_ON-L

POWER_FAIL

AT+5.2V

GND

MOTOR_GND

FROM/TO DECK

CP3001

TMC-J12P-B2

CAP FG

CAP VCO

VCC

CAP.M/F/R

I LIMIT

MOTOR GND

GND

LD/CY VCO

CAP CTL

LDM CTL

CYL FG/PG

CYL CTL

4 BOT SENSOR

Q3008

ST-304L

5.0

H-11

P.CON+5V

AT+5.2V

MS_SEN B

Q3004

RPI-352C40N

5.1

2 3

5.1

MS_SEN A

Q3005

RPI-352C40N

0.9

2 3

5.1

1.2

2.4

0.9

1 4

1.3

0.4

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

1.3

REEL SENS

5.2

Q3002

RPI-303

D E

SYSCON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(VCR PCB)

REEL SENS

Q3001

RPI-303

2 1

1.2

R3049

47K

OUT

5.0

GND

D3009

1SS133

5.2

3 4

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

D E

C3033_1

35V 330 YK

L3002

22uH

R3003

3.3K

C3040

1 F

CAP_FG

W818

AT+12.6_V

P.CON+5V

CAP_F/R

CAP_LIMIT

AT+12.6_V

CONTROL_IN

LDM_CTL

CYL_FG/PG

CYL_DRIVE

5.0

EOT SENSOR

Q3006

ST-304L

R3011

47K 1/4W

AT+5.2V

(LED_GND)

AT+5.2V

TAB_SW

EOT

BOT

C3025

12P CH

X3001

100BT01004

10MHz

R3034

CAP_LIMIT

LDM_CTL

CAP_F/R

C3008

0.0047 B

CONTROL_IN

CYL_DRIVE

CYL_FG/PG

R3008

C3007

0.1

AT+5V[M-CON]

TV/VCR

POWER_MUTE-L

SYS_MUTE

AV_SW2

AV_SW1

Y/C_CS

RF_CH_SW

AUDIO_MUTE-H

V.REC_ST-H

C.ROTARY

H.AMP_SW

COMP

R3031

H.SW

HIFI_H.SW

C.SYNC

R3057

R3032

10K

22K

C3004

0.022

W835

5.0

3.3

5.0

5.1 3.4 2.5

83 82 81 80

0 5.1 1.4 1.5

78 77 76

4.8

4.9 5.0

64 63

4.8 4.8

62 61

5.1

5.0

0.1

5.1

2.4

2.5

2.7

3.0

2.5

R3014 56K 2.7

R3012

56K

2.7

SYS MUTE

FL CLK/VSC CLK

FL DATA/VSC DATA

AV SW2

AV SW1

Y/C CS

RF CH SW

AUDIO MUTE-H

V.REC ST-H

LDM_CTL

CAP FWD-L

C.ROTARY

H.AMP SW

COMP

CAP FULL

CYL SPEED UP

D FG/PG

VIDEO H.SW

HIFI H.SW

DRUM PWM

CAP PWM

DUMMY_V.SYNC

VSS (GND)

111

112

VCR_H

POWER MUTE-L

C SYNC

VCC (BACK UP)

SYSCON/TIMER/SERVO IC

IC3001

OEC0138B

VCC (BACK UP)

SEG1

Y/C DATA

ST SELECT

KEY-A

KEY-B

0 4.8

4.8

60 59 58

C3061

0.1 F

5.1

4.8

5.0

Y/C CLK

5G/CS/BS LED

5.0

4G/TIME SHIFT LED

3G/TV/VCR LED

5.0

2G/DUB/REC LED

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

ZERO

POWER ON-L

5.0

VCR LED

DVD RESET

0.3

DVD LED

DVD_POWER_CTL

5.1

3.3

REM IN

4.7

5.0

VIDEO_MUTE-H

REC_L/ REEL T

0.1

VSC_L/ REEL S

5.0

POWER FAIL

5.1

AVCC (BACK UP)

TAB SW

SERVICE

2.5

AFT S.CURVE

3.7

HiFi ENV

0.4

5.1

5.2

CTL+

CTL-

R3017

560

R3020

560

C3013_1

16V 22

2.5

3 4

0 2.5

0.1

2.6

2.5

2.3

5.1

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

2.0

1.5

0.4

0 3.1

2.6

5.1

2.6

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

0 2.5

0 2.6

0 0 1.3

1.3

R3025

C3016

22 C3038

470

L3003 1 F

6.3V

47 KA

12uH

C3044

D3007

1SS133

R3010

10K

12P CH

C3015

820P CH

5.2

5.3

W838

RX DRIVE

Q3003

DTA124EKA

3.4

RX DRIVE

Q3007

DTC124EKA

W837

SEG_1

Y/C_DATA

Y/C_CLK

5G/CS/BS_LED

4G/VSC_LED

3G/TV/VCR_LED

2G/DUB/REC_LED

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

VCR_LED

DVD_LED

DVD_POWER_CTL

REM_IN

R3055

R3038

22K

C3036

VCR_POWER_ON-L

4.7K

1/4W

VIDEO_MUTE-H

AT+5.2V

REC_L/REEL-T

VSC_L/REEL-S

0.1

POWER_FAIL

AT+5V[M-CON]

TAB_SW

SERVICE

TP3001

AFT-S.CURVE

HIFI_ENV.DET

ST_SELECT

KEY-A

KEY-B

AT+5.2V

5.2

5.0

4.9

C3030

1 F

RECORD LUMINANCE SIGNAL

RECORD COLOR SIGNAL

PLAYBACK LUMINANCE SIGNAL

PLAYBACK COLOR SIGNAL

G H

TP3002 H.SW

FROM/TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

DUMMY_V.SYNC

C.SYNC

V.REC_ST-H

C.ROTARY

AUDIO_MUTE-H

CTL-

CTL+

H.AMP_SW

COMP

ENV.DET

H.SW

Y/C_CS

Y/C_DATA

Y/C_CLK

4FSC

FROM/TO TUNER/JACK

RF_CH_SW

SW_V_OUT

AV_SW1

AV_SW2

SCL

SDA

AFT-S.CURVE

TV/VCR

VIDEO_OUT

POWER_MUTE-L

VIDEO_MUTE-H

DVD_RESET

SYS_MUTE

FROM/TO HI-FI/DEMODULATOR

V.REC_ST-H

HIFI_ENV.DET

HIFI_H.SW

AUDIO_MUTE-H

SCL

SDA

ST_SELECT

FROM/TO OPERATION1/DISPLAY

SEG_2

SEG_3

SEG_4

SEG_5

SEG_6

SEG_7

SEG_8

SEG_9

SEG_10

DVD_LED

VCR_LED

KEY-A

KEY-B

REM_IN

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

2G/DUB/REC_LED

3G/TV/VCR_LED

4G/VSC_LED

5G/CS/BS_LED

SEG_1

JG3002 JG3003 JG3004 JG3005 JG3006 JG3007 JG3008

MD0

RESET

FWE

AT+5V[M-CON]

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

PCB010

VMC300

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

G H

H-12

A B C D E

TUNER/JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(VCR PCB)

TU301

115-V-H015ARE

A.IN

CH 2

+B 3

CONTROL 4

V.IN

RF MUTE SW

Q301

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

0 0

25V

C315_1

10 KA

R304

C318_1

RF_CONV_A_OUT

10K

25V 10 KA

RF_CH_SW

L301

P.CON+5V

22uH 0305

TV/VCR

R302

NC 7

FSC

NC 9

CLOCK

DATA 11

AFT 12

A.OUT

SIF OUT

TU 32V 15

V.OUT

C307

100P CH

W821

C303

0.1

C308

0.01

B W879

C313_1

25V 10 KA

R306

120

FSC

SCL

SDA

AFT-S.CURVE

+32V

TU_V_OUT

D8003

MTZJ6.8B

C8014

0.1

C8013

50V 10 YK

P.CON+12V

R8009

470 1/2W

VIDEO MUTE SW

Q8003

DTC124EKA

VIDEO_MUTE-H

3.3

2.6

BUFFER

Q8004

KTA1266

W853

2 3

R L V

REAR OUT JACK

J8001

MSP -213V1-432 NI LF

VIDEO OUT

TP8001

R8011

100

R8014

390 R8015

390

MUTE SW

Q8006

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

R8016

0 MUTE SW

Q8005

2.2K

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

R8017

2.2K

R8032

470 R8056

470

MUTE SW

Q8007

DTA124EKA

5.0

5.2

2 3

H1 NC

L R

SIF_OUT

TU/REAR_V_IN

REAR_V_IN

TU_V_OUT

C8040

6.4

50V 4.7

AV SW IC

IC8002 MM1501XNRE

5.7

Vin1 SW1

0 5.7

GND V OUT

6.7

11.5

Vin2 Vcc

L8008

47uH

R8059

4.7K

1/4W

D8008

1SS133

C8031

50V 4.7

C8032

16V 4.7

KANP

7.8

AV SW IC

IC8005 MM1501XNRE

Vin1 SW1

0 7.0

GND V OUT

8.4

11.7

Vin2 Vcc

AUDIO_OUT_R

AUDIO_OUT_L

AT+5.2V

POWER_MUTE-L

P.CON+5V

VIDEO_OUT

DVD_RESET

SYS_MUTE

DVD_V_OUT[DAC_D]

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

L8004

47uH

AV_SW1

SW_V_OUT

P.CON+12V

AUDIO_OUT_L

AUDIO_OUT_R

RF_CONV_A_OUT

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

CP8002 (CP8102)

IMSA-9604S-08C

DVD_RESET

SYS_MUTE 6

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO 5

GND

DVD_AUDIO_L

GND

DVD_AUDIO_R

FFC

CD8002

2F080601

FROM/TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

DVD_V_OUT[DAC_D]

FSC

TU/REAR_V_IN

Y/C_VIDEO_OUT

FROM/TO SYSCON

DVD_RESET

SYS_MUTE

SCL

SDA

AV_SW1

AV_SW2

TV/VCR

RF_CH_SW

AFT-S.CURVE

POWER_MUTE-L

VIDEO_MUTE-H

VIDEO_OUT

SW_V_OUT

FROM/TO HI-FI/DEMODULATOR

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_A_OUT_L

SIF_OUT

REAR_A_IN_L

REAR_A_IN_R

AUDIO_OUT

HIFI_A_OUT_R

HIFI_A_OUT_L

FROM POWER

GND

+32V

AT+5.2V

P.CON+5V

P.CON+12V

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

ATTENTION :LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

CAUTION :SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

A B C D E

RECORD COLOR SIGNAL

RECORD LUMINANCE SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNAL(REC)

AUDIO SIGNAL(PB)

H-13

PLAYBACK VIDEO SIGNAL

TUNER VIDEO SIGNAL

PLAYBACK LUMINANCE SIGNAL

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

PLAYBACK COLOR SIGNAL

PCB010

VMC300

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

G H

H-14

A B C D E

OPERATION/DISPLAY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(VCR PCB)

V651 LTG-0366AM-J

F G H

H-15

FROM/TO OPERATION1,2

CP652 (CP601)

TOC-G12X-A1

FRONT V IN

GND

FRONT A IN L

GND

FRONT A IN R

GND

KEY-A

KEY-B

POWER LED

GND

REM IN

AT+5.2V

W841

FRONT_V_IN

FRONT_A_IN_L

FRONT_A_IN_R

KEY-A

KEY-B

VCR_LED

REM_IN

AT+5.2V

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

B C

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

SEG1 SW

Q664

DTC124EKA

1.9

2.0

5.2

1G SW

Q665

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

1.7

4.9

SEG2 SW

Q663

DTC124EKA

0 0.4

R674

180

4.0

R673

SEG3 SW

Q662

DTC124EKA

0 0.4

4.0

180

R672

2G SW

Q661

180

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

5.2

1.7

4.9

SEG4 SW

Q660

DTC124EKA

0 1.1

4.0

R670

SEG5 SW

Q658

DTC124EKA

1.0

3.0

4.9

180

R668

3G SW

Q659

180

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

5.2

1.7

SEG6 SW

Q657

DTC124EKA

0.4

R667

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

R665

R662

180

R663

180

R666

180

4G SW

Q654

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

1.7

5.2

SEG7 SW

Q656

DTC124EKA

3.1

SEG10 SW

Q652

DTC124EKA

0.9

SEG9 SW

0.4

Q653

DTC124EKA

4.0

5G SW

Q651

4.0

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

1.3

5.2

SEG8 SW

Q655

DTC124EKA

3.5

4.9

180

4.0

4.9

R683

270

5.2

DVD LED SW

Q666

DTA124EKA

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

GND

D656

1N4005-EIC

FROM/TO SYSCON

SEG_5

SEG_6

SEG_7

SEG_8

SEG_9

SEG_10

REM_IN

KEY-B

KEY-A

DVD_LED

VCR_LED

1G/VCR/T-REC_LED

2G/DUB/REC_LED

3G/TV/VCR_LED

4G/VSC_LED

5G/CS/BS_LED

SEG_1

SEG_2

SEG_3

SEG_4

TO HI-FI/DEMODULATOR

FRONT_A_IN_L

FRONT_A_IN_R

TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

FRONT_V_IN

FROM POWER

LEM_VCC

AT+5.2V

GND

AT+5.2V

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

PCB010

VMC300

AUDIO SIGNAL(REC)

RECORD COLOR SIGNAL

RECORD LUMINANCE SIGNAL

H-16

H-17

A B C

C743_1

50V 0.22

C744

0.1

R716

3.3K

D E

H i-Fi/DEMODULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(VCR PCB)

F G

P.CON+5V

C752_1

HIFI_A_OUT_R

16V 22 KA

A.VCC

L702_1

22uH 0305

ST_SELECT

C758_1

HIFI_A_OUT_L

P.CON+12V

16V 22 KA

L703

100uH 0305

AUDIO_OUT

C754

16V 47 KA

W803

TO_NORMAL_A

FROM_NORMAL_A

R718

C747

50V 10 YK

R719

330

C755

0.022 B

C748

0.1 F

C750_1

50V 2.2

R717

2.2M

C746

0.1

25V

C749

0.1

C757

1 F

C756_2

W880

HI-FI/AUDIO/HEAD AMP/DEM IC

IC701

AN3663FBP

2.2

3.4

DEM_BLK

3.5

2.1

2.3

4.7

C751

0.1

2.7

4.9

2.5

MAIN

DEEN

4.5M

TRAP

SUB

BPF

CUE

BPF

SUB

DET

DEMOD

4.9

1.6

LOGIC

DEMOD

95HMz

BPF

MUTE VCO-F0

CTL ADJ

LOGIC

3.5M

VCO

COMP

LOGIC SW21

PNR RCH

ZZ-PROM

S/N

SW NOISE

4.2

SW9

AUDIO

LIMIT

2.3

1.2

4.3

11.0

LOG

AMP

USA

AN3663FBP

AMP

SUB DEEN

OUTPUT SW

R L

AMP

MATRIX

MUTE

FROM 1PIN

SW18

SW19

HIFI

MIX

MUTE

SW17

SW16

MIX

HIFI

FROM 3PIN

RFC

PC PB LPF

RCH BPF

FM UM

SW10

LCH BPF

PC PB LPF

2.4

0.7

2.4

SW12

PB REC

RCH

VCO

REC LPF

HPF

NOISE

DET

LINER

HOLD

TIMING

16V

C759_1

22 KA

4.3

1.0

2.4

DET

SW22 L

MIX

SW2

PNR LCH

AUDIO

LIMIT

SW4

SW NOISE

SW14

CURR

C760

1 F

2.3

2.2

INPUT_SW(L)

INPUT_SW(R)

MIX

S/N

REC LPF

LCH VCO

DET

AGC

SW15

SW11

0.6

2.3

VREF1

4 5 6

2.2

2.4

2.1

0.5

9 10

11 12

0 2.0

2.2

14 15

0 2.4

2.4

C730

C731

0.015

2.1

50V 0.22

1.8

D701

1SS133

1.8

C732 0.01 F

2.5

C729 0.01 B

C722

4.9

0.1

0.6

C723

0.01

C761

6.3V

0.7

C724

0.01

C725 0.1

HIFI ENV.

TP701

V.REC_ST-H

HIFI_ENV.DET

HIFI_H.SW

L704

P.CON+5V

10uH

2.4

C726

2.4

C727_2

0.7

C728_1

0.015

25V

10 KA

FROM OPERATION/DISPLAY

FRONT_A_IN_L

FRONT_A_IN_R

FROM/TO TUNER/JACK

REAR_A_IN_L

REAR_A_IN_R

SIF_OUT

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

AUDIO_OUT

HIFI_A_OUT_R

HIFI_A_OUT_L

FROM/TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

HF2

HF1

HF_COM

FSC

FROM_NORMAL_A

TO_NORMAL_A

A.VCC

FROM POWER

P.CON+5V

P.CON+12V

GND

FROM/TO SYSCON

V.REC_ST-H

HIFI_ENV.DET

HIFI_H.SW

AUDIO_MUTE-H

SCL

SDA

ST_SELECT

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

E F

AUDIO SIGNAL(REC)

AUDIO SIGNAL(PB)

PCB010

VMC300

H-18

A B C D

W870

POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(VCR PCB)

F G H

TO Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

P.CON+5V

GND

0.5

0.1

SWITCHING

Q501

STP5NC50FP

R508

100 1/4W

HS501

763WSA0017

0.5

0.3

PROTECT CONTROL

Q502

KTC3203_Y

R537

220

D504

1SS133

R538

220

D506

1N4005-EIC

D503

1N4005-EIC

AC120V_60HZ

CD501

09419910

WHITE

S502

BLACK S501

BLACK

L502

W5T_20*10*10A

2.5A 125V

F501

51MS025L

2.5A125V

FH501

EYF-52BCY

FH502

EYF-52BCY

COIL,LINE FILTER

L501

0R4A223F20

D502

1N4005-EIC

D505

1N4005-EIC

R504

560 1/2W

C509

0.018

D531

MTZJ10B

16.0

139.3

142.0

T501

C527

0.0082

PHOTO COUPLER

IC503

PS2561L1-1-V(W)

12.5

0.3

C516

250V 0.0047

81260074

5.1

4.1

12.9

16.6

R519

W806

AT+12.6_V

D507

RGP15J

C531

500V 560P B

W849

W831

B502

W5RH3.5X5X1.0

L505

22uH 0305

9V REG. IC

IC502 KIA78R09API

12.4

12.8

12.2

P.CON+12V SW

Q510

KTC3203_Y

P.CON+12V

19.1

P.ON SW

Q509

DTC124EKA

R509

100

VCR_POWER_ON-L

W816

MOTOR_GND

DVD_POWER_CTL

P.CON+9V

FROM/TO SYSCON

AT+5.2V

DVD_POWER_CTL

VCR_POWER_ON-L

POWER_FAIL

AT+5V[M-CON]

AT+12.6_V

P.CON+5V

GND

MOTOR_GND

D536

1SS133

D537

1SS133

D522

10ELS6N

4.1

R545_1

15 1/4W

3.7

3.4

3.2

3.3V OUT

Q511

KTA1241_Y

3.1

1.8

3.9

1.8

1.0

3.3V CTL

Q507

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

1.0

3.3V CTL

Q508

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

D518

1SS133

R517

820 1/2W

VOLTAGE CTL IC

IC501 KIA431

C524

0.022 B

4.1

21DQ04N

PROTECT

Q530

D511

21DQ04N

D512

OUT

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

GND

0 2.5

L506 22uH

13.2

3.3

PROTECT

Q531

2SA1037AK

C507

2.2

C541

2.2

R536

560

11.6

OUT

9.0

GND

5.0

R513

390 1/2W

5.9

P.CON5V SW

Q505

KTC3209_Y

5.2

5.1

TO TUNER/JACK

+32V

AT+5.2V

P.CON+5V

P.CON+12V

GND

P.CON+5V_DH

P.CON+3.3V

TO OPERATION/DISPLAY

LEM_VCC

AT+5.2V

GND

5.2

5.8

P.CON+5V SW

Q503

KTC3209_Y

5.2

R514

220 1/2W

GND

LEM_VCC

AT+5.2V

P.CON+5V

TO HI-FI/DEMODULATOR

P.CON+5V

P.CON+12V

GND

5.2

M-CON +5V SW

Q504

KTA1271_Y

5.1

4.4

C534

1 F

GND

AT+5V[M-CON]

R544

1K 1/4W

0.1

5.1

M-CON POWER SW

Q506

DTC124EKA

5.3

D526

MTZJ3.3B

0.7

POWER FAIL SW

Q513

2SC2412K

POWER FAIL SW

Q514

2SC2412K

+32V

P.CON+3.3V

W867

GND

AT+5.2V

POWER_FAIL

P.CON+5V_DH

P.CON+9V

P.CON+12V

AT+5.2V

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON

CP501 (CP4002)

CH2C0302

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+5V

P.CON+9V A

MOTOR GND

P.CON+12V

AT+5V

PCB010

VMC300

H-19

2.5A 125V

CAUTION

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,

REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE 2.5A 125V(F501).

ATTENTION

:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE

N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE 2.5A 125V(F501).

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

A B C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

H-20

A B C

(OPERATION

1 PCB)

D E F

OPERATION

1,2/FRONT AV JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

OPERATION1

FROM/TO AV JACK

CP603

B2013H02-6P

(CP602)

1 AT+5.2V

REM IN

GND

VCR LED

KEY-B

KEY-A

R603

6.2K 1/4W

R606

56K 1/4W

OS601

PIC-37143TH5

(FRONT JACK PCB)

H-21

FROM/TO OPERATION/DISPLAY

CP601 (CP652)

00_6232_012_102

AT+5.2V

REM IN

GND

VCR LED

KEY-B

KEY-A

GND

FRONT A IN R

GND

FRONT A IN L

GND

FRONT V IN

CD601

2W0C1004

GND

C601

16V 10 KA

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

C D

G H

PCB270

VECA42

AV JACK

(OPERATION2 PCB)

OPERATION2

PCB260

VECA44

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

R685

13K 1/4W

R686

6.8K 1/4W

R691

220K 1/4W

R687

6.8K 1/4W

R690

33K 1/4W

R689

3.3K

1/4W

GND

FROM/TO OPERATION/DISPLAY

CP681 (CP651)

IMSA-9604S-05Z13

DVD LED

GND

KEY-A

KEY-B

R692

1.5K 1/4W

CD681

2H051202

PCB280

VECA43

H-22

H-23

A B C

(RELAY PCB)

CP1

IMSA-9615S-08C-PP

SLD.MTR(-)

SLD.MTR(+)

SP.MTR(-)

SP.MTR(+)

L.SW

GND

VCC

PCB68A

BEC002

D E

RELAY/SW/FG SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

M2002

BCD3B02

M2001

JCL9B61

S1005X

S1004X

S1001X

S1003X

S1002X

S1005

S1004

S1001

S1003

S1002

S1005Y

S1004Y

S1001Y

S1003Y

S1002Y

AWD28

(SW PCB)

PCB640

BEC001

SW2

SW1AB-271-10A

SG-107F6

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

C D

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

E F

H-24

A B C

DVD

DRIVE

DM-2

OPTICAL PICK-UP

SPINDLE MOTOR

SLED,LOADING MOTOR

FG SENSER

MON(COM)

GND(NC)

VCC

VREF

GND(PDIC)

T-

T+

F-

F+

MON(DVD)

NC(SW)

VOL(DVD)

GND(DVD)

LD(DVD)

LD(CD)

VOL(CD)

GND(CD)

SLD-

SLD+

SP1-

SP1+

LIMIT SW

GND

SP_FG

+5V

GND(D)

OPEN

CD2001

CD2301

FFC

CP2601

T-

T+

F-

F+

MON(DVD)

NC(SW)

VOL(DVD)

VCC

VREF

GND(PDIC)

GND(DVD)

LD(DVD)

LD(CD)

VOL(CD)

GND(CD)

MON(COM)

GND(NC)

CP2602

1 SLD-

SLD+

SP1-

SP1+

LIMIT SW

GND

SP_FG

+5V

CP2603

GND(D)

OPEN

L8504

GND(M)

P.CON+9V

P.CON+5V

P.CON+3.3V

GND

SPDIF-134

GND

CD8505

P.CON+3.3V

CP4002

GND

7 P.CON+5V

P.CON+9V A

MOTOR GND

P.CON+12V

AT+5V

FFC

CP8001

GND

GND(M)

P.CON+9V

P.CON+D5V

P.CON+3.3V

GND

SPDIF-134

CP501

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+5V

P.CON+9V A

MOTOR GND

P.CON+12V

AT+5V

CP8002

DVD_AUDIO_R

GND

DVD_AUDIO_L

GND 5

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO 4

SYS_MUTE

DVD_RESET

CD8002

FFC

CP8102

DVD_AUDIO_R

GND

DVD_AUDIO_L

GND

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO

SYS_MUTE

DVD_RESET

DVD PCB

PCB130

VMC298

VIDEO OUT SW

SW8101

OPTICAL

OS8101

1 INPUT

VCC

GND

DVD AUDIO OUT

J8101

3 2

H1 H1

J218 J210

DON’T USE

Y/C SEPA

J8102

4 3

6 5

YUV OUT

J8103

3 2

AC120V_60HZ

CD501

L502

WHITE

BLACK

S502

S501

H-25

NOTE: THIS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

B C

D E

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

COMMAND TRANSMITTER

TM101

OS601

GND

B+

Vout

OPERATION2 PCB

PCB280

VECA43

FRONT JACK PCB

PCB260

VECA44

OPERATION1 PCB

PCB270

VECA42

FRONT AV JACK

AUDIO R

J603

FRONT AV JACK

AUDIO L

J602

FRONT AV JACK

VIDEO

J601

F G H

FULL ERASE HEAD ASS’Y

HALL

SENSOR

MAIN

COIL

ROTOR

MAGNET

FG SENSOR

CP3001

CAP FG

CAP VCO

VCC

CAP.M F/R

I LIMIT

MOTOR GND

GND

LD/CY VCO

CAP CTL

LDM CTL

CYL FG/PG

CYL CTL

HALL

VCC

HALL

OUT

SWITCH

LOGIC

CAPSTAN DD UNIT ASS’Y

M2001

RED WHITE

LOADING MOTOR

M101

VCR PCB

PCB010

VMC300

DON’T USE

J218 J210

3 2

H2 H1

L R

REAR IN JACK

J8002

2 3

H1 NC

L R

ATTENTION :LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

D E

TU301

A.IN

CH 2

+B 3

CONTROL 4

V.IN

NC 7

FSC

NC 9

CLOCK

DATA 11

AFT

A.OUT

SIF OUT

TU 32V 15

V.OUT

HF1_(R)

HF_COM

HF2 (L)

CP101

SP-CH1 (R)

SP_COM

SP-CH2 (L)

EP/LP-CH1 (R)

EP/LP_COM

EP/LP-CH2 (L)

FPC

CP102

AUDIO REC 6

AUDIO PB

CTL+

CTL-

AE HEAD(+)

AE HEAD(-)

FFC

HEAD AUDIO CONTROL ASS’Y

H5001

AUDIO REC

AUDIO PB

CTL+

CTL-

AE HEAD(+)

AE HEAD(-)

UN4001

CYLINDER UNIT ASS’Y

HI-FI HEAD

SP HEAD

EP/LP HEAD

AUDIO

CONTROL

CAUTION :SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES

DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

F G

H-26

MPEG/MICON

10ns

100mV

1

MEMORY

5ns

20mV

2

RF AMP/DSP

200ns

20mV

3

200ns

10mV

4

AUDIO/VIDEO

500

µ s

100mV

5

500

µ s

100mV

6

WAVEFORMS

µ s

100mV

11

200ns

20mV

7

µ s

100mV

8

µ s

100mV

12

Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP

µ s

500mV

16

µ s

100mV

9

100ns

100mV

17

µ s

100mV

10

1ms

100mV

18

NOTE: The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding balloon number in the schematic diagram.

I-1

200

µ s

1.0V

22

POWER ON

50ns

1.0V

23

200ms

500mV

19

REC

µ s

20V

20

SYSCON

5ms

1.0V

21

500

µ s

1.0V

24

WAVEFORMS

POWER

µ s

500mV

38

5ms

500mV

25

µ s

5.0V

39

5ms

2.0V

27

Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR

10ms

1.0V

28

TUNER/JACK

µ s

200mV

32

NOTE: The following waveforms were measured at the point of the corresponding balloon number in the schematic diagram.

I-2

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

206

202

123

203

112

121

105

PCB010

(VCR PCB ASS'Y)

104

103

106

102

113

103

106

204

209

203

201

117

209

107

PCB260

(FRONT JACK PCB ASS'Y)

114

208

PCB270

(OPERATION 1 PCB ASS'Y)

208

101C

115

101K

101G

101F

101E

101D

101J

101H

101I

203

208

203

122

203

116

206

209

120

113

124

203

PCB130

(DVD PCB ASS'Y)

205

207

108

205

111

109

205

119

205

203

206

101L

101B

101A

101K

101

PCB280

(OPERATION 2 PCB ASS'Y)

J1-1

126

127

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

(PACKING DIAGRAM)

110, 118, 132, 133, 134, 135

131

CD6002, CD6003

TM601

129

125

127

130

128

J1-2

349

CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW (TOP VIEW)

505

CD1501

300

M2003

UN4001

341

331

334

314

323

508

333

501

H5002

315

336

324

335

342

503

504

H5001

306

322

508

312

305

302

AA AA

332

347

301

313

CD1502

M101

304

318

325

317

309

319

307

320

316

348

321

510

507

506

346

345

CLASS MARK

GREASE AA

NOTE: Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.

Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

J2-1

CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW (BOTTOM VIEW)

308

509

344

327

343

328

326

303

300

M2001

CD1501

338

502

337

502

CD1502

340

502

AA AA

329

311

339

310

505

330

CLASS MARK

GREASE AA

NOTE: Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.

Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

J2-2

600

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW

608

613

612

619

606

615

618

604

CD2302

701

SW1

617

705

603

610

602

614

616

CLASS

GREASE

SW2

703

PCB640

(SW PCB ASS'Y)

605

601

702

704

CD2001

Do not replace the parts. Because, minute adjustments are needed if this condition is disassembled further more.

If the repair is needed, replace the

DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

607

622

621

M2602

CP1

PCB68A

(RELAY PCB ASS'Y)

623

609

620

611

CD2301

MARK

NOTE: Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.

Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

J3-1

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

101

101A

101B

101C

101D

101E

101F

101G

101H

101I

101J

101K

101L

115

116

117

118

119

110

111

112

113

114

AE001418

AE001851

AE001852

AE001853

AE001419

AD301577

AE001174

AE003278

AE004071

AE001856

AE002694

AE004072

AD300845

AE002854

AE002751

AE004073

AE001178

BZ710582

BZ710581

BZ710239

BZ710678

AD301575

AE001854

AE002171

AE002618

AE004066

AE004067

AE002739

AE002740

AE004068

AE001167

AE001847

AE002742

AE002743

AE001324

AE001848

AD301567

AE002744

BZ710577

BZ710658

BZ710466

BZ710331

BZ710498

AE001160

AE004069

AE001166

AE004074

AD301688

BZ710633

BZ710659

AE002746

AE002747

AE001420

AE002690

AE002782

AE001591

Reference No.

752WSA0359

761WPA0262

8965TS1010

8965TS1017

761WPA0292

791WHA0100

792WHA0489

792WHAA117

793WCDC203

795WCA0662

795WCAA181

A2C536X975

JB5UD500

J2A70617B

J2C50643A

J2C53601A

8154730414

8109130B94

8109230704

8109I30A04

8109230804

8109K30601

8107130404

8110326A04

810F130804

A2C536X720

701WPJC603

711WPDA644

712WPBA081

712WPJC011

7230007689

7235490018

736WPJA007

736WPJA008

742WKA0001

743WKA0042

800WFA0051

800WQ00084

701WPA0686

701WPA0751

752WSA0230

753WUAA006

85OP700038

702WSAA068

722549A352

7230007673

J2C53607A

7260000341

752WSA0275

752WSA0290

761WPA0301

752WUA0006

761WSA0127

702WSAA077

J5F10129B

761WSA0130

Description

CABINET,FRONT ASSY

CABINET,FRONT

PLATE,DISPLAY

FLAP,VCR

FLAP,DVD

SHEET,LED

BADGE,BRAND

BUTTON,FRAME-VCR

BUTTON,FRAME-DVD

SPRING,DVD-FLAP

SPRING,FLAP

CUSHION,LEG

DOUBLE FACE TAPE

HOLDER,DECK

SHIELD,CASE HEAD AMP

SPRING,EARTH HEAD AMP

HOLDER,END SENSOR

PLATE,BOTTOM

SHEET,RATING

SHEET,JACK

QUICK SET-UP SHEET(SPANISH)

SHEET,CAUTION

COVER,AC HEAD

SHIELD,COMPO

HOLDER,FFC

SHIELD,3PIN

ANGLE,FRONT

CABINET,TOP

INFORMATION SHEET

ANGLE,DVD

ANGLE,DVD 2

HOLDER,DECK TOP

CUSHION 65TS10-10

HOLDER,DVD

GIFT SHEET

10x20x25

17.5x20x14

PACKAGE,FRONT

PACKAGE,BACK

GIFT,BOX

PAD,DVD/VR 155x250

PAD,L 340x480x160

INSTRUCTION BOOK KIT

POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION)

REGISTRATION CARD

NETFLIX CARD

INSTRUCTION BOOK

SCREW,TAP TITE(B)

SCREW,TAP TITE(B) R PAN

SCREW,TAP TITE(B) R BIND

SCREW,TAP TITE(B) WH7

M3x41R

3x29

3x7

3x10

SCREW,TAP TITE(B) BIND 3x8

SCREW,TAP TITE(B) BIND(3D) 3x6

SCREW,TAP TITE(S) PAN 3x4

SCREW TAP TITE(P) FLAT

SEMS(F)

2.6x10

3x8

K1-1

CHASSIS REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N

501

502

503

504

505

506

507

508

509

340

341

342

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

BZ710546

BZ710110

BZ710547

BZ710548

BZ710549

BZ710565

BZ710551

BZ710552

BZ710106

BZ710514

BZ710049

BZ710058

BZ710371

BZ710046

BZ710050

BZ710553

BZ710219

BZ710056

BZ710054

510 BZ710017

CD1501 BZ614292

CD1502 BZ614339

H5001 AD301675

H5002 AD301676

M101

M2001

BZ710566

AE002696

M2003 BZ710657

UN4001 AD301954

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

327

328

329

310

311

312

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

300

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

BZ710529

BZ710530

BZ710531

BZ710532

BZ710533

BZ710534

BZ710535

BZ710536

BZ710537

BZ710538

BZ710092

BZ710093

BZ710366

BZ710762

BZ710540

BZ710541

BZ710763

BZ710543

BZ710544

BZ710545

AE001857

AE002754

BZ710682

BZ710193

BZ710515

BZ710094

BZ710112

BZ710516

BZ710517

BZ710518

BZ710519

BZ710520

BZ710521

BZ710522

BZ710650

BZ710524

AE000442

BZ710526

BZ710527

BZ710528

Reference No.

85OP600582

85OP800322

85OP800360

85OP800355

85OP800356

85OP900750

85OP900744

85OP900745

85OP700035

85OP900746

8107226804

83ETW30000

8107226404

8102120604

8109126604

810A130404

810A126504

82Q264713N

82P184505N

8107226604

122H071704

122Y021902

1523Q91003

1543Q02014

1596P98001

1510S98040

1589S11017

A2C301N500

85OP900739

85OA900228

85OP000496

85OP200316

85OP200317

85OP200308

85OP200311

85OP200312

85OP200313

85OP300194

85OP400490

85OP400492

85OP400520

85OP400542

85OP400533

85OP600573

85OP600584

85OP600577

85OP600578

85OP600579

A2C303N420K

85OA400240

85OA500026

85OP200290

85OP600581

85OP500083

85OP800324

85OA000459

85OA200089

85OA200090

85OA300065

85OA300066

85OA400223

85OA400232

85OA400235

85OA400231

85OP800367

85OP900736

85OP900748

85OP900749

Description

DECK ASSY

PINCH ROLLER BLOCK (VA)

AHC ASS'Y

BELT,CAPSTAN (S)

WORM

BASE,AC HEAD

SPRING,AC HEAD

MAIN CHASSIS ASS'Y

CLUTCH ASS'Y

ARM IDLER ASS'Y

LOADING ARM S UNIT

LOADING ARM T UNIT

INCLINED BASE T UINT 3S

P5 ARM ASS'Y 2

TENSION ARM ASS'Y 2

INCLINED BASE S UNIT

SPRING,LOCKER

CASS,HOLDER

CASS,SIDE L

CASS,SIDE R

LOCKER,R

LINK UNIT

POST,CASS GUIDE

REEL,S (S)

REEL,T (S)

GEAR,IDLER

GEAR,CLUTCH

GEAR,COUPLING

LEVER,CLUTCH

GEAR,MAIN LOADING

LEVER,TENSION

HOLDER,TENSION

CAP.P4

BAND,TENSION

CONNECT,TENSION

ARM,BRAKE T

BAND,BRAKE T

CAM,PINCH ROLLER

CAM,MAIN

ROD,MAIN

A2C303N420K

GEAR,JOINT

SPRING,TENSION

SPRING,BRAKE T

SPRING,COUPLING

SPRING,RING

LEVER,LINK 2

LEVER,FLAP

CASS,OPENER

REFLECTOR,LED

BRACKET,TOP 3V

SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND

E-RING

SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND

SCREW,PAN

2.6x8

3.0

2.6x4

M2x6

SCREW,TAP TITE(B) PAN

SCREW/WASHER(A)

2.6x6

M3x4

M2.6x5

POLYSLIDER WASHER 2.6x4.7xT0.13

POLYSLIDER WASHER(CUT) 1.8x4.5xT0.5

SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND

CORD JUMPER

HEAD (AUDIO CONTROL)

HEAD (FULL ERASE)

MOTOR (LOADING)

CAPSTAN DD UNIT

MICRO MOTOR

CYLINDER UNIT ASS'Y

2.6x6

2H071704

2Y021902

VTR-1X2RPE22-756

VTR-1X2ERS11-154

MXN13FB12K3

F2QVB33B

I2OAL05

A2C301N500

K2-1

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N

610

611

612

613

614

615

616

617

618

619

600

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

609

620

621

622

623

701

702

703

704

705

AD301847

AD301842

AE002180

AD301844

BZ710187

AD301851

AD301852

AD301853

AD301913

CD2001 AD301855

CD2301 AD301856

CD2302 AE000148

CP1 AD301858

M2602 AD301861

PCB640 AD301862

PCB68A AD301863

SW1

SW2

AD301866

AE001158

AE002755

AD301822

AE002480

AE002481

AD301825

AD301826

AD301827

AD301846

AE001179

AD301845

AE002482

AE002179

AD301833

AD301834

AD301835

AE001336

AD301837

AE002647

AD301839

AD301840

Reference No.

92P100030A

92P100025A

92P100083A

92P100027A

8110226804

8110120604

8107220504

8140117254

8110220804

122H0O1901

122H080701

06CH232101

069JV80180

1515S98001

A5E601V640

A5E601V680

0515S32001

0500101036

A5E602V650P

92P100022A

92P100080A

92P100081A

92P100035A

92P200006A

92P200007A

92P100029A

92P300009A

92P100028A

92P300019A

92P100040A

92P000001A

92P100019A

92P100020A

92P100039A

92P100023A

92P100082A

92P300002A

92P400002A

Description

DVD MECHA ASS'Y

TRAVERSE HOLDER

RACK,FEED 1A

RACK,FEED 2A

LEVER,RACK FEED

INSULATOR(F)

INSULATOR(R)

GEAR,FEED

SPRING,RACK L

GEAR,MIDDLE 3

SPRING,RACK FEED 1A

ARM,IDLER 2

CLAMPER PLATE

RACK,LOADING

MAIN FRAME M

TRAY

GEAR,MAIN

CLAMPER 2

SPRING,RACK LOADING

MAGNET,CLAMPER

A5E602V650P

GEAR,IDLER

GEAR,MOTOR

GEAR,MIDDLE 1

GEAR,MIDDLE 2

SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2.6x8

SCREW,TAP TITE(P) PAN 2x6

SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND 2x5

SCREW,PAN M1.7x2.5 P3

SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2x8

CORD JUMPER

CORD CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

FEED MOTOR

PCB ASS'Y

SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

2H0O1901

2H080701

CH232101

IMSA-9615S-08C-PP-A

BCD3B81

BEC001A

BEC002A

SSS-23-6

ESE22MH22

K3-1

Location No.

TSB P/N

R304

R305

R306

! R501

! R502

R504

R506

R507

R508

R509

R510

R511

R131

R132

R133

R136

R137

R138

R139

R140

R141

R142

R143

R301

R302

R115

R116

R117

R119

R120

R121

R122

R123

R124

R126

R127

R129

R101

R102

R103

R105

R106

R107

R108

R109

R110

R111

R112

R113

R114

! R512

R513

R514

R515

! R516

R517

R518

R519

R520

R521

R522

R523

R524

R525

R526

R527

R528

R529

R530

R531

R532

AE001820

AE001832

AE001846

AE001827

AE001007

AE001827

AE001788

BZ210126

AE001813

AE001833

AE001813

AE001814

AE001813

AE001889

BZ210219

AE001780

AE000145

AE001774

AE001814

AD301203

AE001812

AE001815

AE001299

AE001839

AE001814

AE001813

AE001842

AE001832

AE001827

BZ210119

AE001846

AE001282

AE001825

AE000851

AE001845

AE001821

AE001843

AE001824

AE001825

AE001813

AE001815

BZ210126

AE001806

AE001824

AE001802

AE001824

AE001779

AE000934

AE000350

AE001828

BZ210190

AE000483

AE001819

AE001813

AE001795

AE001835

AE001795

AE001843

AD301203

AE001814

AE001786

AD301203

AE001777

AE001826

AE001283

AE001804

AE001814

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

RESISTORS

R,FUSE

R,METAL OXIDE

R904N7152J

R904N7332J

R904N7822J

R904N7223J

R002T4123J

R904N7223J

R803R9123J

R002T4222J

R904N7102J

R904N7333J

R904N7102J

R904N7103J

R904N7102J

R803R9121J

R0G3K2335K

R3X181R82J

R002T2561J

R002T2105J

R904N7103J

R002T4101J

R904N7101J

R904N7104J

R803R9564J

R904N7561J

R904N7103J

R904N7102J

R904N7681J

R904N7332J

R904N7223J

R002T4102J

R904N7822J

R803R9334J

R904N7221J

R803R9203J

R904N7821J

R904N7153J

R904N7682J

R904N7182J

R904N7221J

R904N7102J

R904N7104J

R002T4222J

R803R9823J

R904N7182J

R803R9684J

R904N7182J

R3X181683J

R002T2391J

R002T2221J

R904N7272J

R63581R22J

R002T2821J

R904N7151J

R904N7102J

R803R9332F

R904N7471J

R803R9332F

R904N7682J

R002T4101J

R904N7103J

R803R9122F

R002T4101J

R002T4392J

R904N7222J

R803R9470J

R803R9821F

R904N7103J

Description

68K OHM 1W

390 OHM 1/2W

220 OHM 1/2W

2.7K OHM 1/10W

0.22 OHM 1W

820 OHM 1/2W

150 OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/10W

3.3K OHM 1/16W

470 OHM 1/10W

3.3K OHM 1/16W

6.8K OHM 1/10W

100 OHM 1/4W

10K OHM 1/10W

1.2K OHM 1/16W

100 OHM 1/4W

3.9K OHM 1/4W

2.2K OHM 1/10W

47 OHM 1/16W

820 OHM 1/16W

10K OHM 1/10W

1.5K OHM 1/10W

3.3K OHM 1/10W

8.2K OHM 1/10W

22K OHM 1/10W

12K OHM 1/4W

22K OHM 1/10W

12K OHM 1/16W

2.2K OHM 1/4W

1K OHM 1/10W

33K OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/10W

120 OHM 1/16W

3.3M OHM 1/2W

0.82 OHM 1W

560 OHM 1/2W

1M OHM 1/2W

10K OHM 1/10W

100 OHM 1/4W

100 OHM 1/10W

100K OHM 1/10W

560K OHM 1/16W

560 OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/10W

680 OHM 1/10W

3.3K OHM 1/10W

22K OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/4W

8.2K OHM 1/10W

330K OHM 1/16W

220 OHM 1/10W

20K OHM 1/16W

820 OHM 1/10W

15K OHM 1/10W

6.8K OHM 1/10W

1.8K OHM 1/10W

220 OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/10W

100K OHM 1/10W

2.2K OHM 1/4W

82K OHM 1/16W

1.8K OHM 1/10W

680K OHM 1/16W

1.8K OHM 1/10W

K4-1

Location No.

TSB P/N

R685

R686

R687

R689

R690

R691

R692

R701

R702

R703

R704

R705

R664

R665

R666

R667

R668

R669

R670

R671

R672

R673

R674

R675

R683

R553

R554

R601

R602

R603

R604

R605

R606

R607

R661

R662

R663

R533

R534

R535

R536

R537

R538

R540

R541

R542

R543

R544

! R545

R552

R706

R707

R708

R709

R710

R711

R712

R714

R716

R717

R718

R719

R721

R722

R723

R2301

R2303

R2304

R2305

R2306

R2307

AE001845

AE001823

AE001845

AE001823

AE001845

AE001823

AE001845

AE001293

AE001776

BZ210162

BZ210060

BZ210202

BZ210125

AD301301

AE001820

AE001814

AE001801

BZ210135

AE000374

AE001839

AE001825

AE001835

BZ210192

AE001819

AE001815

BZ210119

AE001255

AE001812

BZ210118

BZ210182

BZ210107

BZ210060

AE001778

BZ210162

AD301203

AE001555

BZ210135

AE001845

AE001823

AE001797

AE001837

AE001843

AE001801

AE001797

AE001837

AE001843

AE001792

AE001832

AE001791

AE001813

AE001831

AE001821

AE000358

AE001783

AE001793

AE000854

AE001840

AE001792

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

RESISTORS

R,FUSE

R904N7821J

R904N7181J

R904N7821J

R904N7181J

R904N7821J

R904N7181J

R904N7821J

R904N7271J

R002T4133J

R002T4682J

R002T4332J

R002T4333J

R002T4224J

R002T4152J

R904N7152J

R904N7103J

R803R9682J

R002T4221J

R801R7223J

R904N7561J

R904N7221J

R904N7471J

R002T4223J

R904N7151J

R904N7104J

R002T4102J

R65584150J

R904N7101J

R002T4473J

R002T4103J

R002T4750J

R002T4332J

R002T4622J

R002T4682J

R002T4101J

R002T4563J

R002T4221J

R904N7821J

R904N7181J

R803R9473J

R904N7473J

R904N7682J

R803R9682J

R803R9473J

R904N7473J

R904N7682J

R803R9273J

R904N7332J

R803R9225J

R904N7102J

R904N7331J

R904N7153J

R002T4471J

R803R9102J

R803R92R2J

R803R9513J

R904N7562J

R803R9273J

Description

820 OHM 1/10W

180 OHM 1/10W

820 OHM 1/10W

180 OHM 1/10W

820 OHM 1/10W

180 OHM 1/10W

820 OHM 1/10W

270 OHM 1/10W

13K OHM 1/4W

6.8K OHM 1/4W

3.3K OHM 1/4W

33K OHM 1/4W

220K OHM 1/4W

1.5K OHM 1/4W

1.5K OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

6.8K OHM 1/16W

220 OHM 1/4W

22K OHM 1/10W

560 OHM 1/10W

220 OHM 1/10W

470 OHM 1/10W

22K OHM 1/4W

150 OHM 1/10W

100K OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/4W

15 OHM 1/4W

100 OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/4W

10K OHM 1/4W

75 OHM 1/4W

3.3K OHM 1/4W

6.2K OHM 1/4W

6.8K OHM 1/4W

100 OHM 1/4W

56K OHM 1/4W

220 OHM 1/4W

820 OHM 1/10W

180 OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/16W

47K OHM 1/10W

6.8K OHM 1/10W

6.8K OHM 1/16W

47K OHM 1/16W

47K OHM 1/10W

6.8K OHM 1/10W

27K OHM 1/16W

3.3K OHM 1/10W

2.2M OHM 1/16W

1K OHM 1/10W

330 OHM 1/10W

15K OHM 1/10W

470 OHM 1/4W

1K OHM 1/16W

2.2 OHM 1/16W

51K OHM 1/16W

5.6K OHM 1/10W

27K OHM 1/16W

K4-2

Location No.

TSB P/N

R2618

R2619

R2620

R2621

R2622

R2623

R2624

R2625

R2626

R2627

R2628

R2629

R2604

R2605

R2607

R2608

R2609

R2610

R2611

R2612

R2613

R2614

R2615

R2616

R2617

R2325

R2326

R2327

R2328

R2329

R2330

R2331

R2334

R2337

R2601

R2602

R2603

R2308

R2309

R2310

R2312

R2313

R2314

R2316

R2318

R2319

R2321

R2322

R2323

R2324

R2630

R2631

R2632

R2635

R2643

R2644

R2645

R2646

R2647

R2648

R2649

R2650

R2651

R2652

R2653

R3001

R3002

R3003

R3004

R3006

R3007

AE001289

AE001284

AE001817

AE001787

AE001817

AE001291

AD302345

AE001285

AE001811

AE001813

AE001811

AE001812

AD302345

AE001812

AD302345

AE001820

AE001827

AE001820

AE000851

AE004090

AE001799

AE000851

AE001840

AE001792

AE000854

AD302345

AE001832

AE001783

AE001801

AE001805

AD302345

AE001783

AE004090

AE001784

AD302345

AE001288

AE001286

AE001827

AE001816

AD302345

AE001813

AE001790

AE001813

AE001826

AD302345

AE001287

AE001781

AD302345

AE001781

AE001840

AE001775

AE001832

AE001829

AE001837

AE001843

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

RESISTORS

R8E3P9273F

R8E3P9103F

R904N7122J

R803R9122J

R904N7122J

R8E3P9512F

R803R9472J

R8E3P9123F

R904N7100J

R904N7102J

R904N7100J

R904N7101J

R803R9472J

R904N7101J

R803R9472J

R904N7152J

R904N7223J

R904N7152J

R803R9203J

R803R9471F

R803R9562J

R803R9203J

R904N7562J

R803R9273J

R803R9513J

R803R9472J

R904N7332J

R803R9102J

R803R9682J

R803R9822J

R803R9472J

R803R9102J

R803R9471F

R803R9103J

R803R9472J

R8E3P9185J

R8E3P9133F

R904N7223J

R904N7105J

R803R9472J

R904N7102J

R803R9222J

R904N7102J

R904N7222J

R803R9472J

R8E3P9133J

R803R9101J

R803R9472J

R803R9101J

R904N7562J

R002T4121J

R904N7332J

R904N7274J

R904N7473J

R904N7682J

Description

27K OHM 1/16W

10K OHM 1/16W

1.2K OHM 1/10W

1.2K OHM 1/16W

1.2K OHM 1/10W

5.1K OHM 1/16W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

12K OHM 1/16W

10 OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/10W

10 OHM 1/10W

100 OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

100 OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

1.5K OHM 1/10W

22K OHM 1/10W

1.5K OHM 1/10W

20K OHM 1/16W

470 OHM 1/16W

5.6K OHM 1/16W

20K OHM 1/16W

5.6K OHM 1/10W

27K OHM 1/16W

51K OHM 1/16W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

3.3K OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/16W

6.8K OHM 1/16W

8.2K OHM 1/16W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

1K OHM 1/16W

470 OHM 1/16W

10K OHM 1/16W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

1.8M OHM 1/16W

13K OHM 1/16W

22K OHM 1/10W

1M OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

1K OHM 1/10W

2.2K OHM 1/16W

1K OHM 1/10W

2.2K OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

13K OHM 1/16W

100 OHM 1/16W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

100 OHM 1/16W

5.6K OHM 1/10W

120 OHM 1/4W

3.3K OHM 1/10W

270K OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/10W

6.8K OHM 1/10W

K4-3

Location No.

TSB P/N

R3063

R3083

R3087

R4001

R4002

R4003

R4004

R4005

R4008

R4012

R4014

R4016

R3043

R3044

R3045

R3046

R3047

R3049

R3050

R3051

R3053

R3055

R3056

R3057

R3062

R3026

R3027

R3028

R3029

R3030

R3031

R3032

R3033

R3034

R3035

R3037

R3038

R3008

R3009

R3010

R3011

R3012

R3014

R3015

R3016

R3017

R3019

R3020

R3022

R3025

R4018

R4019

R4020

R4021

R4022

R4023

R4024

R4025

R4026

R4027

R4031

R4032

R4033

R4034

R4035

R4036

R4037

R4038

R4039

R4040

R4041

AE001838

AE001832

AE001814

AE001837

AD301203

AE001292

AE001838

AE001827

AE001813

AE001827

AE001813

AE001833

AE001290

AE001809

AE001810

AE001809

AE001812

AE001816

AD302345

AE001781

AE001813

AE001836

AE001814

BZ210118

AE001841

BZ210118

AD301004

AE001839

BZ210118

AE001839

AE001822

AE001835

AE001829

AE001821

BZ210118

AE001836

AE001840

AE001816

AE001814

AE001816

AD301728

AE001837

BZ210122

AD302345

AE001830

AE001794

AE001814

AD302345

AE001825

AE001812

AE001781

AD302345

AE001808

AE001811

AE001782

AD302345

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

RESISTORS

R904N7474J

R904N7332J

R904N7103J

R904N7473J

R002T4101J

R904N7183J

R904N7474J

R904N7223J

R904N7102J

R904N7223J

R904N7102J

R904N7333J

R8E3P9391F

R8E3P9750F

R8E3P9820F

R8E3P9750F

R904N7101J

R904N7105J

R803R9472J

R803R9101J

R904N7102J

R904N7472J

R904N7103J

R002T4473J

R904N7563J

R002T4473J

R801R7271J

R904N7561J

R002T4473J

R904N7561J

R904N7154J

R904N7471J

R904N7274J

R904N7153J

R002T4473J

R904N7472J

R904N7562J

R904N7105J

R904N7103J

R904N7105J

R801R7103J

R904N7473J

R002T4472J

R803R9472J

R904N7330J

R803R9330J

R904N7103J

R803R9472J

R904N7221J

R904N7101J

R803R9101J

R803R9472J

R8E3P9511F

R904N7100J

R803R9102F

R803R9472J

Description

4.7K OHM 1/16W

33 OHM 1/10W

33 OHM 1/16W

10K OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

220 OHM 1/10W

100 OHM 1/10W

100 OHM 1/16W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

510 OHM 1/16W

10 OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/16W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

470K OHM 1/10W

3.3K OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/10W

100 OHM 1/4W

18K OHM 1/10W

470K OHM 1/10W

22K OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/10W

22K OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/10W

33K OHM 1/10W

390 OHM 1/16W

75 OHM 1/16W

82 OHM 1/16W

75 OHM 1/16W

100 OHM 1/10W

1M OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

100 OHM 1/16W

1K OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/4W

56K OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/4W

270 OHM 1/10W

560 OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/4W

560 OHM 1/10W

150K OHM 1/10W

470 OHM 1/10W

270K OHM 1/10W

15K OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/4W

4.7K OHM 1/10W

5.6K OHM 1/10W

1M OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

1M OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/4W

K4-4

Location No.

TSB P/N

R8113

R8114

R8115

R8116

R8117

R8118

R8119

R8120

R8121

R8122

R8123

R8124

R8059

R8101

R8102

R8103

R8104

R8105

R8106

R8107

R8108

R8109

R8110

R8111

R8112

R8128

R8129

R8130

R8131

R8132

R8133

R8134

R8135

R8136

R8137

R8151

R7306

R7307

R8001

R8009

R8010

R8011

R8014

R8015

R8016

R8017

R8032

R8056

R4042

R4043

R4044

R4045

R4046

R4047

R4048

R4049

R4050

R4051

R4052

R4053

R4054

C101

C103

C104

C105

C106

C107

C108

C109

C110

BZ210122

AE001814

AE001815

AE001785

AE001814

AE001797

AE001837

AE001784

AE001818

AE001814

AE001796

AE001798

AE001783

AE001796

AE001784

AE001813

AE001838

AD302345

AE001832

AE001783

AD302345

AE001783

AE001294

AE001814

AE001784

AD302345

AE001830

AE001837

AD302345

AE001783

AE001814

AE001803

AE000353

AE001844

AE001812

AE001834

AE001826

AE001835

AE001813

AE001814

AE001826

AE001820

AE001832

AE000496

AE001796

AE001800

AE001785

AE001784

AE001773

BZ110263

AE001768

BZ110263

AE001743

AE001746

AE001743

AE001741

BZ210177

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

P232W1223J

E50HU2220M

E50HU0221M

E50HU2220M

CS0YB0414K

CS0YB04E4K

CS0YB0414K

CS0YB0215K

E02LU2470M

RESISTORS

CAPACITORS

CMP

R002T4472J

R904N7103J

R904N7104J

R803R9104J

R904N7103J

R803R9473J

R904N7473J

R803R9103J

R904N7123J

R904N7103J

R803R9471J

R803R9560J

R803R9102J

R803R9471J

R803R9103J

R904N7102J

R904N7474J

R803R9472J

R904N7332J

R803R9102J

R803R9472J

R803R9102J

R904N7680J

R904N7103J

R803R9103J

R803R9472J

R904N7330J

R904N7473J

R803R9472J

R803R9102J

R904N7103J

R803R9750J

R002T2471J

R904N7750J

R904N7101J

R904N7391J

R904N7222J

R904N7471J

R904N7102J

R904N7103J

R904N7222J

R904N7152J

R904N7332J

R801R7221J

R803R9471J

R803R9680J

R803R9104J

R803R9103J

Description

4.7K OHM 1/4W

10K OHM 1/10W

100K OHM 1/10W

100K OHM 1/16W

10K OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/16W

47K OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/16W

12K OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

470 OHM 1/16W

56 OHM 1/16W

1K OHM 1/16W

470 OHM 1/16W

10K OHM 1/16W

1K OHM 1/10W

470K OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

3.3K OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/16W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

1K OHM 1/16W

68 OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/16W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

33 OHM 1/10W

47K OHM 1/10W

4.7K OHM 1/16W

1K OHM 1/16W

10K OHM 1/10W

75 OHM 1/16W

470 OHM 1/2W

75 OHM 1/10W

100 OHM 1/10W

390 OHM 1/10W

2.2K OHM 1/10W

470 OHM 1/10W

1K OHM 1/10W

10K OHM 1/10W

2.2K OHM 1/10W

1.5K OHM 1/10W

3.3K OHM 1/10W

220 OHM 1/10W

470 OHM 1/16W

68 OHM 1/16W

100K OHM 1/16W

10K OHM 1/16W

0.022 UF 100V MMTS

22 UF 16 V

220 UF 6.3V

22 UF 16 V

0.01 UF 50V B

0.015 UF 50V B

0.01 UF 50V B

0.1 UF 16V B

47 UF 16V

K4-5

Location No.

TSB P/N

C121

C122

C123

C124

C125

C126

C127

C129

C131

C132

C133

C134

C140

C141

C142

C143

C144

C112

C114

C115

C116

C117

C118

C119

C120

C126

C127

C129

C131

C132

C133

C134

C135

C136

C137

C138

C139

C112

C114

C115

C116

C117

C118

C119

C120

C121

C122

C123

C124

C125

C135

C136

C137

C138

C139

C140

C141

C142

C143

C144

C145

C146

C147

C148

C151

C152

C154

C155

C156

C158

C159

AE001764

AE001743

AE001543

AE001763

AE001743

AE001768

AE001741

AE001769

AE002756

AE001743

AE001544

BZ110074

AE001273

AE001744

AE000467

BZ110074

AE001274

AE001741

AE001731

BZ110278

BZ110150

BZ110074

AE001763

BZ110074

AE001768

AE001741

AE001769

AE002756

AE001743

AE001544

BZ110074

AE001273

AE001744

AE000467

BZ110074

AE001274

AE001741

AE001731

BZ110278

BZ110150

BZ110074

AE001763

BZ110074

AE001767

BZ110229

BZ110074

AD300788

AE002756

AE001767

BZ110229

BZ110074

AD300788

AE002756

AE001764

AE001743

AE001543

AE001763

AE001743

AE001748

BZ110074

AE001748

BZ110074

BZ210177

AE001741

BZ110278

BZ110151

AE001741

AE001755

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

CAPACITORS

E00NU24R7M

CS0YB0414K

E50HU0470M

CS0YF0N16Z

CS0YB0414K

E50HU0221M

CS0YB0215K

E50HU1330M

CS0YF0415Z

CS0YB0414K

E50HU3100M

E50HU5010M

CS0PB04K3K

CS0YB04B3K

E02LU54R7M

E50HU5010M

CS0PCH4N2J

CS0YB0215K

CS0PCH4G2J

CS0RB0216K

E50HU0101M

E50HU5010M

CS0YF0N16Z

E50HU5010M

E50HU0221M

CS0YB0215K

E50HU1330M

CS0YF0415Z

CS0YB0414K

E50HU3100M

E50HU5010M

CS0PB04K3K

CS0YB04B3K

E02LU54R7M

E50HU5010M

CS0PCH4N2J

CS0YB0215K

CS0PCH4G2J

CS0RB0216K

E50HU0101M

E50HU5010M

CS0YF0N16Z

E50HU5010M

E02LU5R22M

E02LU4220M

E50HU5010M

E02LU5010M

CS0YF0415Z

E02LU5R22M

E02LU4220M

E50HU5010M

E02LU5010M

CS0YF0415Z

E00NU24R7M

CS0YB0414K

E50HU0470M

CS0YF0N16Z

CS0YB0414K

CS0YB04H4K

E50HU5010M

CS0YB04H4K

E50HU5010M

E02LU2470M

CS0YB0215K

CS0RB0216K

CS0RF0415Z

CS0YB0215K

CS0YCH4H1J

Description

4.7 UF 16 V

0.01 UF 50V B

47 UF 6.3V

1 UF 10V F

0.01 UF 50V B

220 UF 6.3V

0.1 UF 16V B

33 UF 10 V

0.1 UF 50V F

0.01 UF 50V B

10 UF 25 V

1 UF 50V

0.0027UF 50V B

0.0012UF 50V B

4.7 UF 50V

1 UF 50V

390 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 16V B

180 PF 50V CH

1 UF 16V B

100 UF 6.3V

1 UF 50V

1 UF 10V F

1 UF 50V

220 UF 6.3V

0.1 UF 16V B

33 UF 10 V

0.1 UF 50V F

0.01 UF 50V B

10 UF 25 V

1 UF 50V

0.0027UF 50V B

0.0012UF 50V B

4.7 UF 50V

1 UF 50V

390 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 16V B

180 PF 50V CH

1 UF 16V B

100 UF 6.3V

1 UF 50V

1 UF 10V F

1 UF 50V

0.22 UF 50V

22 UF 35V

1 UF 50V

0.1 UF 50V F

0.22 UF 50V

22 UF 35V

1 UF 50V

0.1 UF 50V F

4.7 UF 16 V

0.01 UF 50V B

47 UF 6.3V

1 UF 10V F

0.01 UF 50V B

0.022 UF 50V B

1 UF 50V

0.022 UF 50V B

1 UF 50V

47 UF 16V

0.1 UF 16V B

1 UF 16V B

0.1 UF 50V F

0.1 UF 16V B

22 PF 50V CH

K4-6

Location No.

TSB P/N

C528

C530

C531

C534

C540

C541

C601

C604

C701

C702

C703

C704

C512

C513

C514

C515

! C516

C517

C518

C519

C521

C522

C524

C525

C527

C315

C318

C501

! C502

C504

C505

C506

C507

C508

C509

C510

C511

C162

C163

C165

C166

C169

C172

C174

C301

C303

C307

C308

C309

C313

C705

C706

C707

C708

C709

C710

C711

C712

C713

C714

C715

C716

C717

C718

C719

C720

C721

C722

C723

C724

C725

AE001763

AE000029

AD301535

AE001722

AE002878

AE001763

BZ110231

AE001253

AD301535

BZ110205

AE001748

AD301320

AE001749

AD301535

AE001723

AE001763

BZ110186

AE001740

BZ110096

BZ110150

AE001748

BZ110217

AE000467

BZ110074

AE001741

AE001543

AE001278

AE001738

AE001278

AE001755

AE001543

AE001762

AE001275

AE001729

AE001726

BZ110143

AE001544

BZ110119

BZ110035

BZ110143

AD301535

BZ110189

AE001740

AE001749

AE001281

BZ110205

BZ110186

AE001770

BZ110074

AE001741

AE001544

AE001734

AE001544

AE001737

AE001763

AE001544

AE001744

AE001763

AE001734

AE001737

AE001763

AE000337

AE001744

AE001741

AE001762

AE001741

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

CAPACITORS

CMP

CS0YF0N16Z

C0PLRR7H2K

E02LU2101M

C0J0B0514K

CD39E0MQ3M

CS0YF0N16Z

E62F00222M

E02L01222M

E02LU2101M

E02LU5220M

CS0YB04H4K

C0PLRR7U2K

CS0YB04W3K

E02LU2101M

C0JTB05S2K

CS0YF0N16Z

E62QFC470M

CS0RF02H6Z

E50HU2100M

E50HU0101M

CS0YB04H4K

E50HU53R3M

E02LU54R7M

E50HU5010M

CS0YB0215K

E50HU0470M

CS0YF04Q4Z

CS0RB04U4K

CS0YF04Q4Z

CS0YCH4H1J

E50HU0470M

CS0YF0414Z

CS0PF0415Z

CS0PCH412J

CS0PB0414K

E02LU0221M

E50HU3100M

E02LF2222M

P2122B104M

E02LU0221M

E02LU2101M

E02LU0471M

CS0RF02H6Z

CS0YB04W3K

P1F4T0183J

E02LU5220M

E62QFC470M

E50HU54R7M

E50HU5010M

CS0YB0215K

E50HU3100M

CS0PCH4U2J

E50HU3100M

CS0PF0N16Z

CS0YF0N16Z

E50HU3100M

CS0YB04B3K

CS0YF0N16Z

CS0PCH4U2J

CS0PF0N16Z

CS0YF0N16Z

E02LU5330M

CS0YB04B3K

CS0YB0215K

CS0YF0414Z

CS0YB0215K

Description

4.7 UF 50V

1 UF 50V

0.1 UF 16V B

10 UF 25 V

680 PF 50V CH

10 UF 25 V

1 UF 10V F

10 UF 25 V

0.0012UF 50V B

1 UF 10V F

680 PF 50V CH

1 UF 10V F

33 UF 50V

0.0012UF 50V B

0.1 UF 16V B

0.01 UF 50V F

0.1 UF 16V B

1 UF 10V F

220 PF 2KV R

100 UF 16V

0.01 UF 500V B

0.0047UF 250V

1 UF 10V F

2200 UF 6.3V

2200 UF 10V

100 UF 16V

22 UF 50V

0.022 UF 50V B

680 PF 2KV R

0.0082UF 50V B

100 UF 16V

560 PF 500V B

1 UF 10V F

47 UF 200V

2.2 UF 16V F

10 UF 16V

100 UF 6.3V

0.022 UF 50V B

3.3 UF 50V

4.7 UF 50V

1 UF 50V

0.1 UF 16V B

47 UF 6.3V

0.047 UF 50V F

0.068 UF 50V B

0.047 UF 50V F

22 PF 50V CH

47 UF 6.3V

0.01 UF 50V F

0.1 UF 50V F

100 PF 50V CH

0.01 UF 50V B

220 UF 6.3V

10 UF 25 V

2200 UF 16V

0.1 UF 275V ECQUL

220 UF 6.3V

100 UF 16V

470 UF 6.3V

2.2 UF 16V F

0.0082UF 50V B

0.018 UF 50V

22 UF 50V

47 UF 200V

K4-7

Location No.

TSB P/N

C2304

C2305

C2306

C2307

C2308

C2309

C2310

C2311

C2312

C2603

C2604

C2605

C754

C755

C756

C757

C758

C759

C760

C761

C762

C763

C2301

C2302

C2303

C740

C741

C742

C743

C744

C746

C747

C748

C749

C750

C751

C752

C726

C727

C728

C729

C730

C731

C732

C734

C735

C736

C737

C738

C739

C2606

C2607

C2608

C2609

C2610

C2611

C2612

C2613

C2614

C2615

C2616

C2617

C2618

C2619

C2620

C2621

C2622

C2623

C2624

C2625

C2626

AE000272

AE001748

AE001544

AE001763

BZ110263

AE001763

AE001543

AE001673

AE001275

AE002124

AE001733

AE001275

AE002124

AE001725

BZ210177

AE002124

AE001725

AE001747

AE001727

AE001747

AE001746

AE001544

AE001743

AE001746

AE001771

AE001762

AE001741

AE000467

AE001742

AE001770

AE001762

AE001543

AE001769

AE001544

AE001771

AE002756

AD301348

AE002756

AD301762

AE002756

BZ110263

AE001747

AE001757

BZ210177

AE001275

AE001277

AE001275

AE000835

AE001756

AE001741

AE001275

AE001758

AE001741

AE001759

AE001276

AE001275

AE001742

AE001275

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

CAPACITORS

E50HU2470M

CS0YB04H4K

E50HU3100M

CS0YF0N16Z

E50HU2220M

CS0YF0N16Z

E50HU0470M

CS0YCH4U2J

CS0PF0415Z

CS0PB0315K

CS0PCH4H2J

CS0PF0415Z

CS0PB0315K

CS0PB0413K

E02LU2470M

CS0PB0315K

CS0PB0413K

CS0YB04H3K

CS0PB04H3K

CS0YB04H3K

CS0YB04E4K

E50HU3100M

CS0YB0414K

CS0YB04E4K

E50HU5R22M

CS0YF0414Z

CS0YB0215K

E02LU54R7M

CS0YB0413K

E50HU54R7M

CS0YF0414Z

E50HU0470M

E50HU1330M

E50HU3100M

E50HU5R22M

CS0YF0415Z

E02LU5100M

CS0YF0415Z

E50HU52R2M

CS0YF0415Z

E50HU2220M

CS0YB04H3K

CS0YCH4L1J

E02LU2470M

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YB04U3K

CS0PF0415Z

CS0PB03L4K

CS0YCH4H2J

CS0YB0215K

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YCH4Q2J

CS0YB0215K

CS0YCH4S2J

CS0YB04S3K

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YB0413K

CS0PF0415Z

Description

47 UF 16V

0.022 UF 50V B

10 UF 25 V

1 UF 10V F

22 UF 16 V

1 UF 10V F

47 UF 6.3V

680 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 50V F

0.1 UF 25V B

220 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 50V F

0.1 UF 25V B

0.001 UF 50V B

47 UF 16V

0.1 UF 25V B

0.001 UF 50V B

0.0022UF 50V B

0.015 UF 50V B

10 UF 25 V

0.01 UF 50V B

0.015 UF 50V B

0.22 UF 50 V

0.01 UF 50V F

0.1 UF 16V B

4.7 UF 50V

0.001 UF 50V B

4.7 UF 50V

0.01 UF 50V F

47 UF 6.3V

33 UF 10 V

10 UF 25 V

0.22 UF 50 V

0.1 UF 50V F

10 UF 50V

0.1 UF 50V F

2.2 UF 50V

0.1 UF 50V F

22 UF 16 V

0.0022UF 50V B

33 PF 50V CH

47 UF 16V

0.1 UF 50V F

0.0068UF 50V B

0.1 UF 50V F

0.033 UF 25V B

220 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 16V B

0.1 UF 50V F

470 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 16V B

560 PF 50V CH

0.0056UF 50V B

0.1 UF 50V F

0.001 UF 50V B

0.1 UF 50V F

K4-8

Location No.

TSB P/N

C3015

C3016

C3017

C3018

C3019

C3020

C3021

C3022

C3023

C3024

C3025

C3027

C2659

C2660

C3001

C3002

C3004

C3005

C3006

C3007

C3008

C3009

C3010

C3013

C3014

C2642

C2643

C2644

C2645

C2646

C2647

C2648

C2649

C2654

C2655

C2657

C2658

C2627

C2628

C2629

C2632

C2633

C2634

C2635

C2636

C2637

C2638

C2639

C2640

C2641

C3029

C3030

C3031

C3032

C3033

C3034

C3036

C3038

C3040

C3041

C3044

C3045

C3049

C3050

C3052

C3053

C3061

C3065

C4001

C4002

C4003

AE001729

BZ110278

AE001743

AE001748

AE001742

AE001741

AE001728

AE001741

AE001742

BZ110263

AE002756

AE001735

AE001543

AE001742

AE001730

AE001741

AE001748

AE001544

AE001758

BZ110189

AE001753

AE001752

AE002756

AE000835

AE001742

AE001275

AE001742

AE002756

AE001742

AE002756

AE000335

AE001275

BZ210177

AE001275

BZ210177

AE001275

AE002756

AE001741

AE001743

AE001729

AE001543

AE001763

AE001745

AD301762

AE001766

AE001763

AE002756

AE001763

AE001745

AE001752

AE000958

AE001729

AE001743

BZ110263

AE001741

AE002756

AE001275

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

CAPACITORS

CS0PCH412J

CS0RB0216K

CS0YB0414K

CS0YB04H4K

CS0YB0413K

CS0YB0215K

CS0PB04Q3K

CS0YB0215K

CS0YB0413K

E50HU2220M

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PCH4W2J

E50HU0470M

CS0YB0413K

CS0PCH4E2J

CS0YB0215K

CS0YB04H4K

E50HU3100M

CS0YCH4Q2J

E02LU0471M

CS0YCH4E1J

CS0YCH4B1J

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PB03L4K

CS0YB0413K

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YB0413K

CS0YF0415Z

CS0YB0413K

CS0YF0415Z

E02LU0101M

CS0PF0415Z

E02LU2470M

CS0PF0415Z

E02LU2470M

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YF0415Z

CS0YB0215K

CS0YB0414K

CS0PCH412J

E50HU0470M

CS0YF0N16Z

CS0YB04E3K

E50HU52R2M

E02LT4331M

CS0YF0N16Z

CS0YF0415Z

CS0YF0N16Z

CS0YB04E3K

CS0YCH4B1J

E50HU5R47M

CS0PCH412J

CS0YB0414K

E50HU2220M

CS0YB0215K

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

Description

100 PF 50V CH

1 UF 16V B

0.01 UF 50V B

0.022 UF 50V B

0.001 UF 50V B

0.1 UF 16V B

0.0047UF 50V B

0.1 UF 16V B

0.001 UF 50V B

22 UF 16 V

0.1 UF 50V F

820 PF 50V CH

47 UF 6.3V

0.001 UF 50V B

150 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 16V B

0.022 UF 50V B

10 UF 25 V

470 PF 50V CH

470 UF 6.3V

15 PF 50V CH

12 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 50V F

0.033 UF 25V B

0.001 UF 50V B

0.1 UF 50V F

0.001 UF 50V B

0.1 UF 50V F

0.001 UF 50V B

0.1 UF 50V F

100 UF 6.3V

0.1 UF 50V F

47 UF 16V

0.1 UF 50V F

47 UF 16V

0.1 UF 50V F

0.1 UF 16V B

0.01 UF 50V B

100 PF 50V CH

47 UF 6.3V

1 UF 10V F

0.0015UF 50V B

2.2 UF 50V

330 UF 35V

1 UF 10V F

0.1 UF 50V F

1 UF 10V F

0.0015UF 50V B

12 PF 50V CH

0.47 UF 50V

100 PF 50V CH

0.01 UF 50V B

22 UF 16 V

0.1 UF 16V B

0.1 UF 50V F

K4-9

Location No.

TSB P/N

C4045

C4046

C4047

C4050

C4051

C4062

C4063

C4064

C4065

C4066

C4067

C4068

C4029

C4030

C4031

C4032

C4033

C4035

C4036

C4037

C4038

C4039

C4040

C4041

C4044

C4017

C4018

C4019

C4020

C4021

C4022

C4023

C4024

C4025

C4026

C4027

C4028

C4004

C4005

C4006

C4007

C4008

C4009

C4010

C4011

C4012

C4013

C4014

C4015

C4016

C4069

C4070

C4071

C4072

C4073

C4074

C4075

C4076

C4077

C4078

C4079

C4080

C4081

C4082

C4083

C4084

C4085

C4086

C4087

C4088

C4089

AE002756

AE001275

AE001743

AE001725

AE001275

AE001755

AE002124

AE001275

AE001726

AE002756

AE001275

AE002756

AE001275

BZ110189

AE002756

AE000335

AE002756

AE001726

AE000838

BZ210177

AE002756

AE001275

AE002756

AE001275

AE000335

AE001275

AE000335

AE001275

AE002756

AE001275

AE002756

AE001732

AE002756

AE001275

AE002756

AE001275

BZ210177

AE001275

BZ210177

AE001751

AE001726

AE001275

BZ210177

AE001742

AE001726

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

CAPACITORS

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YB0414K

CS0PB0413K

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YCH4H1J

CS0PB0315K

CS0PF0415Z

CS0PB0414K

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

E02LU0471M

CS0YF0415Z

E02LU0101M

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PB0414K

CS0PB0N16K

E02LU2470M

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

E02LU0101M

CS0PF0415Z

E02LU0101M

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PCH4H1J

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

E02LU2470M

CS0PF0415Z

E02LU2470M

CS0YCH412J

CS0PB0414K

CS0PF0415Z

E02LU2470M

CS0YB0413K

CS0PB0414K

Description

0.1 UF 50V F

0.01 UF 50V B

0.001 UF 50V B

0.1 UF 50V F

22 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 25V B

0.1 UF 50V F

0.01 UF 50V B

0.1 UF 50V F

470 UF 6.3V

0.1 UF 50V F

100 UF 6.3V

0.1 UF 50V F

0.01 UF 50V B

1 UF 10V B

47 UF 16V

0.1 UF 50V F

100 UF 6.3V

0.1 UF 50V F

100 UF 6.3V

0.1 UF 50V F

22 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 50V F

47 UF 16V

0.1 UF 50V F

47 UF 16V

100 PF 50V CH

0.01 UF 50V B

0.1 UF 50V F

47 UF 16V

0.001 UF 50V B

0.01 UF 50V B

K4-10

Location No.

TSB P/N

C8113

C8114

C8115

C8118

C8119

C8120

C8121

C8122

C8123

C8124

C8125

C8126

C8042

C8053

C8057

C8059

C8075

C8101

C8102

C8105

C8106

C8107

C8110

C8111

C8112

C7305

C7306

C7308

C7310

C7311

C8003

C8013

C8014

C8015

C8031

C8032

C8040

C4090

C4091

C4092

C4093

C4094

C4095

C4096

C4097

C4098

C7301

C7302

C7303

C7304

C8129

C8130

C8131

C8132

C8133

C8134

C8135

C8136

C8137

C8138

C8139

C8140

C8141

C8142

C8143

C8144

C8145

C8146

C8147

C8148

C8149

AE001544

AE002756

AE001275

AE001770

AE000337

AE001751

AE001745

AE001729

AE001275

AD301535

BZ110205

AD301729

AE000467

AD301729

BZ110143

AE001756

AE001726

BZ210177

AE001748

BZ210177

AE001275

AE002124

AE001726

AE001729

AE001751

AE001726

AE001725

AE001726

AE001750

AE002756

AD301535

BZ110205

AE002756

AE001760

AD301729

AD301348

AE002756

BZ110189

AE001770

AE001764

AE001770

AE002625

AE001754

AE001752

AE001754

AE001739

BZ110189

AE000565

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Reference No.

CAPACITORS

E50HU3100M

CS0YF0415Z

CS0PF0415Z

E50HU54R7M

E02LU5330M

CS0YCH412J

CS0YB04E3K

CS0PCH412J

CS0PF0415Z

E02LU2101M

E02LU5220M

E02LU52R2M

E02LU54R7M

E02LU52R2M

E02LU0221M

CS0YCH4H2J

CS0PB0414K

E02LU2470M

CS0YB04H4K

E02LU2470M

CS0PF0415Z

CS0PB0315K

CS0PB0414K

CS0PCH412J

CS0YCH412J

CS0PB0414K

CS0PB0413K

CS0PB0414K

CS0YCH411D

CS0YF0415Z

E02LU2101M

E02LU5220M

CS0YF0415Z

CS0YCH4W2J

E02LU52R2M

E02LU5100M

CS0YF0415Z

E02LU0471M

E50HU54R7M

E00NU24R7M

E50HU54R7M

CS0RCH412J

CS0YCH4E2J

CS0YCH4B1J

CS0YCH4E2J

CS0RCH411D

E02LU0471M

CS0RCH4L1J

Description

10 UF 25 V

0.1 UF 50V F

4.7 UF 50V

33 UF 50V

100 PF 50V CH

0.0015UF 50V B

100 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 50V F

100 UF 16V

22 UF 50V

2.2 UF 50V

4.7 UF 50V

2.2 UF 50V

220 UF 6.3V

220 PF 50V CH

0.01 UF 50V B

47 UF 16V

0.022 UF 50V B

47 UF 16V

0.1 UF 50V F

0.1 UF 25V B

0.01 UF 50V B

100 PF 50V CH

0.01 UF 50V B

0.001 UF 50V B

0.01 UF 50V B

10 PF 50V CH

0.1 UF 50V F

100 UF 16V

22 UF 50V

0.1 UF 50V F

820 PF 50V CH

2.2 UF 50V

10 UF 50V

0.1 UF 50V F

470 UF 6.3V

4.7 UF 50V

4.7 UF 16 V

4.7 UF 50V

100 PF 50V CH

150 PF 50V CH

12 PF 50V CH

150 PF 50V CH

10 PF 50V CH

470 UF 6.3V

33 PF 50V CH

K4-11

Location No.

TSB P/N

D8001

D8003

D8008

D8101

D8102

D8103

D8106

D8107

D8108

D8109

D8110

D8111

D8112

D8113

D537

D538

D539

D601

D602

D656

D685

D701

D702

D2601

D3001

D3007

D3009

D518

D522

D523

D524

D526

D528

D530

D531

D532

D534

D535

D536

! D502

! D503

D504

! D505

! D506

D507

D509

D510

D511

D512

D513

D514

D515

IC101

IC501

IC502

! IC503

IC701

IC2301

IC2601

IC2602

IC3001

IC3003

IC3099

IC4001

IC4002

IC4003

IC4005

IC4007

IC7301

IC8002

BZ410022

BZ410006

BZ410119

BZ410006

BZ410022

AE001703

BZ410085

AE001703

BZ410006

BZ410020

BZ410121

AD301638

BZ410006

BZ410085

BZ410006

BZ410085

BZ410007

BZ410103

AD300069

BZ410033

BZ410085

AD300070

BZ410033

BZ410006

AD300075

BZ410037

BZ410006

AD302208

BZ410006

AD300075

BZ410061

AD302208

BZ410006

AD301643

BZ611019

BZ611089

AD301771

BZ611114

BZ611126

AE002837

AD301770

AE001858

AD301641

AE002757

AE000842

AE002137

BZ611130

AE000843

BZ611129

AD301777

AD301988

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

I03F3206M0

I1KJ9A4310

I1KA98R09A

000220001W

I01F63FBP0

I03F065600

ICQK067080

I07E00358F

I54F50138B

I9UF032310

A2C533X015

ICQK067620

ICRJ0C04N0

I0GF9XZ010

IF9J0164A7

ICMJ0800A7

I17F0742K0

I0UF015010

Reference No.

DIODES

DIODE,SILICON

LED

DIODE,SILICON

LED

DIODE,SILICON

DIODE,ZENER

DIODE,SILICON

INFRARED LED

DIODE,SILICON

DIODE,ZENER

DIODE,SILICON

DIODE,RECTIFIER

DIODE,ZENER

DIODE,SCHOTTKY

DIODE,SILICON

DIODE,ZENER

DIODE,SCHOTTKY

DIODE,SILICON

DIODE,RECTIFIER

DIODE,ZENER

DIODE,SILICON

DIODE,ZENER

DIODE,SILICON

DIODE,RECTIFIER

DIODE,ZENER

DIODE,SILICON

DIODE,ZENER

DIODE,SILICON

ICS

PHOTO COUPLER

INIT DATA

D1VT001330

D97U06R81B

0021E5Q212

D2WXN40050

0021E5Q212

D1VT001330

D97U05R11B

DDARDS1200

0010E00330

D1VT001330

D97U06R81B

D1VT001330

DDDRL41480

D2WXN40050

D1VT001330

D2WXN40050

D23TGP15J0

D2WXGP10J0

D97U02701B

D28T21DQN4

D2WXN40050

D97U01201B

D28T21DQN4

D1VT001330

D28TELS6N6

D97U03301B

D1VT001330

D97U03R31B

D1VT001330

D28TELS6N6

D97U01001B

D97U03R31B

D1VT001330

Description

1SS133T-77

MTZJ6.8B T-77

LTL-1CHGT-002A

1N4005-EIC

LTL-1CHGT-002A

1SS133T-77

MTZJ5.1B T-77

KDS120RTK

LTE-3271T-012A-O

1SS133T-77

MTZJ6.8B T-77

1SS133T-77

MCL4148

1N4005-EIC

1SS133T-77

1N4005-EIC

RGP15J-G23

RGP10J-EIC

MTZJ27B T-77

21DQ04N-TA2B1

1N4005-EIC

MTZJ12B T-77

21DQ04N-TA2B1

1SS133T-77

10ELS6N-TA1B2

MTZJ33B T-77

1SS133T-77

MTZJ3.3B T-77

1SS133T-77

10ELS6N-TA1B2

MTZJ10B T-77

MTZJ3.3B T-77

1SS133T-77

LA71206M-MPB

KIA431

KIA78R09API

PS2561L1-1-V(W)

AN3663FBP

LA6560

ZR36708TQC

BA10358F-E2

OEC0138B

PST3231NR

ZR36762

AT24C04N-10SI-2.7

PQ070XZ01ZP

M12L64164A-7T

SST39VF800A-70-4C-EK

PCM1742KE/2K

MM1501XNRE

K4-12

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No.

TSB P/N

IC8005

IC8101

Q662

Q663

Q664

Q665

Q666

Q2601

Q2602

Q2603

Q2604

Q2605

Q3001

Q3002

Q530

Q531

Q651

Q652

Q653

Q654

Q655

Q656

Q657

Q658

Q659

Q660

Q661

Q502

Q503

Q504

Q505

Q506

Q507

Q508

Q509

Q510

Q511

Q513

Q514

Q101

Q102

Q103

Q104

Q105

Q106

Q107

Q109

Q301

Q501

Q3003

Q3004

Q3005

Q3006

Q3007

Q3008

Q8003

Q8004

Q8005

Q8006

Q8007

Q8101

Q8102

Q8103

Q8104

Q8105

Q8106

Q8107

AD301988

AE001295

BZ510109

BZ510001

BZ510108

BZ510021

BZ510108

BZ510021

BZ510108

BZ510021

BZ510108

BZ510021

BZ510108

BZ510026

BZ510112

BZ510113

BZ410107

BZ510109

BZ510026

BZ510070

BZ510073

BZ510108

BZ510109

BZ510093

BZ510070

BZ510105

BZ510077

BZ510105

BZ510021

BZ510109

BZ510021

BZ510070

BZ510106

AE002626

BZ510026

BZ410106

BZ410097

BZ510021

BZ410097

BZ510021

BZ510073

BZ510109

BZ510026

BZ510109

BZ510067

BZ510107

BZ510109

BZ510088

BZ510109

L101

L102

BZ310114

BZ310041

Reference No.

I0UF015010

I0QJ045800

ICS

TRANSISTORS

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

TCAA3875SY

T6YJ1037K0

TAAA1504SY

TNYJC05001

TAAA1504SY

TNYJC05001

TAAA1504SY

TNYJC05001

TAAA1504SY

TNYJC05001

TAAA1504SY

TPYJC05001

T67J1036K0

T27T030180

0002700690

TCAA3875SY

TPYJC05001

TCAT032034

TAATA12660

TAAA1504SY

TCAA3875SY

TJXG5NC500

TCAT032034

TCAT03209Y

TAAT012714

TCAT03209Y

TNYJC05001

TCAA3875SY

TNYJC05001

TCAT032034

TAAT01241Y

T8YJ2412K0

TPYJC05001

0002700680

0000M00390

TNYJC05001

0000M00390

TNYJC05001

TAATA12660

TCAA3875SY

TPYJC05001

TCAA3875SY

TNAAC05002

TPAAA05001

TCAA3875SY

TNAAD05001

TCAA3875SY

031626009R

02167F101J

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

COIL,BIAS OSC

COIL

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

FET

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

FET

PHOTO COUPLER

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

PHOTO COUPLER

PHOTO TRANSISTOR

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

PHOTO TRANSISTOR

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

COMPOUND TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR,SILICON

Description

MM1501XNRE

NJM4580M(TE1)

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

DTA124EKAT146

KTC3203_Y-AT

KTA1266-AT(Y,GR)

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

STP5NC50FP

KTC3203_Y-AT

KTC3209_Y-AT

KTA1271_Y-AT

KTC3209_Y-AT

DTC124EKAT146

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

DTC124EKAT146

KTC3203_Y-AT

KTA1241_Y-AT

2SC2412KT146 R,S

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

2SA1037AKT146R,S

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

DTC124EKAT146

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

DTC124EKAT146

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

DTC124EKAT146

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

DTC124EKAT146

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

DTA124EKAT146

2SA1036KT146

2SK3018

RPI-303

DTA124EKAT146

RPI-352C40N

ST-304L

DTC124EKAT146

ST-304L

DTC124EKAT146

KTA1266-AT(Y,GR)

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

DTA124EKAT146

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

KRC103SRTK

KRA101SRTK

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

KRC104SRTK

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

1626009

100 UH

K4-13

J601

J602

J603

J8001

J8002

J8101

J8102

J8103

SW601

SW602

SW603

SW604

SW605

SW685

SW686

SW687

SW689

SW690

SW691

SW3001

SW8101

PCB010

PCB130

PCB260

PCB270

PCB280

B501

B502

B2601

B2602

B2603

B2604

B2605

B4001

B4002

B4003

B4004

B4005

B4006

B4007

B4008

B7301

Location No.

TSB P/N

L3002

L3003

L4001

L8004

L8008

L8101

L8102

L8103

L8104

L8105

L8106

! T501

L103

L105

L106

L107

L301

! L501

L502

L505

! L506

L701

L702

L703

L704

AE002102

BZ310041

BZ310039

AE001705

AD301539

BZ310039

BZ310091

BZ310039

BZ310041

AD301445

BZ310091

AE000773

BZ310191

AE002183

AE000828

AE001704

AE001706

AE002109

AE002110

AE002758

AE002759

AE002760

AD301545

AE002761

AE001707

BZ612016

AD301546

AE002762

AE002763

AE002764

AE002765

AE002766

BZ310122

BZ310121

BZ310186

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

024HT03563

024HT03553

024HC31022

Reference No.

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

021LA65R6K

02167F101J

02167F220J

COIL

02167F220J

029T000107

02AHB0A0A4

02167F220J

021W7A220K

02167F220J

02167F101J

021LA6100J

021W7A220K

021LA6120J

02167F2R2J

021LA6470J

02167F1R0K

02167FR33K

0481260074

060J401096

060J421035

060J411031

060J431020

060J411033

063D700005

060J411032

COIL

COIL,LINE FILTER

CORE,FERRITE

COIL

TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING

JACKS

RCA JACK

JACK

RCA JACK

SWITCHES

SWITCH TACT

0504R01T38

0508S11001

0510Y24001

SWITCH TACT

SWITCH (LEAF)

A2C533X010

A2C533X130

A2C533X260

A2C533X270

A2C533X280

SWITCH SLIDE

P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PCB ASS'Y

MISCELLANEOUS

CORE,BEADS

Description

22 UH

12 UH

2.2 UH

47 UH

1 UH

0.33 UH

81260074

5.6 UH

100 UH

22 UH

0R4A223F20

W5T_20*10*10A

22 UH

100 UH

10 UH

MTJ-032-04B-01-FE_LF

MTJ-032-04A-01-FE_LF

MSP-213V1-432_NI_LF

MSP-213V2-432_NI_LF

MSP-213V1-732_NI_LF

MDC-070V

MSP-213V1-652_NI_LF

EVQ11L05R

LSA-1144EAU

SK42H01G9A

VMC300A

VMC298A

VECA44A

VECA42A

VECA43A

W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2

W5RH3.5X5X1.0

FCM2012H-102T04

K4-14

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

B7302

B8101

B8102

B8103

BT601

CD102

! CD501

CD601

CD603

CD681

CP101

CP102

CP103

CP501

CP601

CP602

CP603

CP651

CP652

CP681

CD6002

CD6003

CD8002

CP2601

CP2602

CP2603

CP3001

CP4002

CP8002

CP8102

! F501

FH501

FH502

OS601

OS8101

TM601

! TU301

Location No.

TSB P/N

V651

X101

X3001

RESISTOR

Reference No.

BZ310186

AE000012

AE001719

AE001245

AE001247

AE002982

AE002767

BZ614011

AE001239

AD301649

AE001242

AE000098

BZ614333

AE001711

AE001241

AE001711

AE001243

AE001712

AE001246

AE001710

AD301555

024HC31022

1412004008

122H061504

1209419910

122W0C1004

WDL6006038

122H051202

0697290620

069J760599

067U002019

06CH2C0302

069EVC3020

067U006049

069J750019

069WVC001A

069J750019

06CPL02006

06CPBA2003

122F080601

069GYOT079

069EV83010

MISCELLANEOUS

CORE,BEADS

BATTERY,MANGAN

CORD,JUMPER

CORD,AC BUSH

CORD,JUMPER

FLAT CABLE

CORD,JUMPER

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

WIRE HOLDER

CORD,CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

WIRE HOLDER

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

CABLE

CORD,RCA PIN

CORD,JUMPER

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

BZ614350

BZ614289

AD301554

AE001240

AE001715

AE002634

AE001713

AE000830

AE001296

AE001237

069S230629

06972C0010

069S2C0629

069J780599

081PC2R505

06710T0009

077Q037002

07AQ000009

076D0HL010

0162300038

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

FUSE

HOLDER,FUSE

REMOTE RECEIVER

OPTICAL DEVICE

TRANSMITTER

RF UNIT

AE002768

AE001717

AE001716

0040E34003

100DT3R528

100BT01004

LED DISPLAY

CRYSTAL

AD301803 100BT02701

RC...................

CARBON RESISTOR

CRYSTAL

CAPACITORS

CC...................

CERAMIC CAPACITOR

CE...................

ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR

CP...................

POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CPP.................. POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

CPL.................. PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMP................... METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CMPL................ METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMPP................ METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

Description

FCM2012H-102T04

R03(AB)E_2P_G

2H061504

9419910

2W0C1004

AWM2468 AWG26 6C BLACK 60MM

2H051202

TOC-C09X-A1

IMSA-9604S-06C

B2013H02-2P

CH2C0302

00_6232_012_102_800

B2013H02-6P

IMSA-9604S-05Z13

TOC-G12X-A1

IMSA-9604S-05Z13

CPL02006

TD-020301-3

2F080601

09-5000-024-001-006

00_6232_008_006_800

A2001WV2-3P

TMC-J12P-B2

A2001WV2-12P

IMSA-9604S-08C

51MS025L

EYF-52BCY

PIC-37143TH5

OFTG038101

ORV202N18030

115-V-H015ARE

LTG-0366AM-J

HC-49/U

HC-49U/S

K4-15

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

Hello! I am an AI chatbot specifically trained to assist you with the Toshiba SD-V396SU Service manual. I have thoroughly reviewed the document and can help you locate the exact information you need or explain the content in clear and simple terms. Whether you’re looking for guidance on specific features, troubleshooting steps, or general usage, feel free to ask your questions. The more details you provide about your concerns or needs, the more accurately and effectively I can assist you!

Show related prompts

Assistant typing

Assistant is out of keyboard. Please, try again later.

Key features

DVD Video Playback
VHS Cassette Recording & Playback
MP3/WMA/JPEG playback
Timer Recording
Progressive Scan
Dolby Digital & DTS
Spatializer Virtual Surround
On-Screen Display (OSD)
Parental Control

Frequently asked questions

This DVD/VCR can play DVD video discs, Video CDs, and Audio CDs. It can also play DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format and CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD, MP3, WMA or JPEG format.

Yes, the SD-V396SU can record from cable TV. However, it cannot receive scrambled programs, so you will need a descrambler box for those channels.

The SD-V396SU can be connected to your TV using a variety of methods, including composite video, S-video, component video, and coaxial cable. Refer to the connections section in the manual for details.

Yes, the SD-V396SU has a timer recording function that allows you to record a TV program while watching a different channel. You can also use the one-touch timer recording (OTR) feature to easily record a program.

Progressive scan is a video technology that displays images line by line, resulting in a smoother, more detailed picture. The SD-V396SU supports progressive scan for DVD video playback on compatible TVs.